1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
\r
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
\r
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
\r
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
\r
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
\r
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
\r
13 % the documentation team
\r
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
\r
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
\r
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
\r
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
\r
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
\r
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
\r
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
\r
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
\r
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
\r
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
\r
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
\r
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
\r
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
\r
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
\r
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
\r
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
\r
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
\r
42 % for customized page headers/footers
\r
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
\r
44 \usepackage{fancyhdr}
\r
45 % change header rule width
\r
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
\r
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
\r
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
\r
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
\r
51 %\let\OrgIndex\index
\r
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
\r
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
\r
55 \use_default_options false
\r
57 customHeadersFooters
\r
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
\r
62 \language_package default
\r
64 \fontencoding global
\r
67 \font_typewriter default
\r
69 \font_default_family default
\r
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
\r
76 \default_output_format default
\r
78 \bibtex_command default
\r
79 \index_command default
\r
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
\r
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
\r
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
\r
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
\r
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
\r
91 \pdf_breaklinks false
\r
92 \pdf_pdfborder false
\r
93 \pdf_colorlinks true
\r
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
\r
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
\r
99 \use_package amsmath 1
\r
100 \use_package amssymb 1
\r
101 \use_package cancel 0
\r
102 \use_package esint 1
\r
103 \use_package mathdots 1
\r
104 \use_package mathtools 0
\r
105 \use_package mhchem 1
\r
106 \use_package stackrel 0
\r
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
\r
108 \use_package undertilde 0
\r
110 \cite_engine_type default
\r
111 \biblio_style plain
\r
112 \use_bibtopic false
\r
114 \paperorientation portrait
\r
115 \suppress_date false
\r
116 \justification true
\r
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
\r
135 \paragraph_separation indent
\r
136 \paragraph_indentation default
\r
137 \quotes_language english
\r
140 \paperpagestyle default
\r
141 \tracking_changes false
\r
142 \output_changes false
\r
143 \html_math_output 0
\r
144 \html_css_as_file 0
\r
145 \html_be_strict true
\r
150 \begin_layout Title
\r
151 The LyX User's Guide
\r
154 \begin_layout Author
\r
159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
161 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
\r
162 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
\r
163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
165 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
\r
176 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
184 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
188 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
\r
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
194 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
\r
202 \begin_layout Standard
\r
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
\r
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
\r
211 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
215 \begin_layout Section
\r
219 \begin_layout Standard
\r
220 LyX is a document preparation system.
\r
221 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
\r
222 scripts, publishable books, business
\r
223 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
\r
224 It is unlike most other
\r
225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
232 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
\r
234 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
\r
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
250 pt type, left justified, 5
\r
251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
259 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
\r
260 not with mechanics.
\r
263 \begin_layout Standard
\r
264 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
\r
269 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
\r
273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
278 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
\r
279 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
\r
280 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
\r
281 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
\r
287 manual describes that, too.
\r
290 \begin_layout Section
\r
294 \begin_layout Standard
\r
295 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
\r
297 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
\r
298 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
\r
302 \begin_layout Standard
\r
303 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
\r
304 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
\r
305 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
\r
307 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
\r
308 only a vertical scrollbar.
\r
309 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
\r
310 The first case is large images.
\r
311 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
\r
312 image and use the option
\r
318 LaTeX and LyX options
\r
321 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
\r
323 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
\r
324 this doesn't work for equations yet.
\r
327 \begin_layout Standard
\r
328 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
\r
330 \begin_inset space ~
\r
334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
336 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
\r
343 \begin_layout Section
\r
347 \begin_layout Standard
\r
348 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
\r
349 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
\r
350 Just select the manual you want to read from the
\r
357 \begin_layout Section
\r
359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
361 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
368 \begin_layout Standard
\r
369 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
\r
371 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
375 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
384 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
\r
385 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
\r
386 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
\r
388 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
\r
389 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
\r
390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
394 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
397 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
\r
398 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
\r
400 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
404 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
408 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
413 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
\r
416 \begin_layout Section
\r
418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
420 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
\r
427 \begin_layout Standard
\r
428 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
\r
429 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
\r
431 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
\r
432 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
\r
436 \begin_layout Standard
\r
437 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
\r
439 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
\r
440 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
\r
443 \begin_layout Standard
\r
444 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
\r
445 you can view from the menu
\r
447 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
460 \begin_inset space ~
\r
466 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
\r
467 reconfigure LyX (menu
\r
469 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
473 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
477 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
\r
478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
485 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
\r
486 More about TeX Code is described in section
\r
487 \begin_inset space ~
\r
491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
493 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
497 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
\r
498 \begin_inset space ~
\r
502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
504 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
\r
514 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
518 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
523 See section 5.1 of the
\r
527 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
\r
530 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
531 How to work with LyX
\r
534 \begin_layout Section
\r
535 Basic File Operations
\r
536 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
548 \begin_layout Standard
\r
553 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
\r
554 in addition to some more advanced operations:
\r
557 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
569 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
573 \begin_inset space ~
\r
577 \begin_inset space ~
\r
583 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
595 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
601 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
613 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
617 \begin_inset space ~
\r
623 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
627 \begin_inset space ~
\r
631 \begin_inset space ~
\r
637 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
641 \begin_inset space ~
\r
647 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
653 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
659 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
665 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
671 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
678 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
\r
679 a few minor differences.
\r
682 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
684 \begin_inset space ~
\r
688 \begin_inset space ~
\r
693 command lists the available templates.
\r
694 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
\r
695 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
\r
696 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
\r
698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
704 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
711 \begin_layout Standard
\r
712 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
744 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
\r
745 space is just that — a big, blank space.
\r
753 \begin_layout Standard
\r
757 \begin_inset space ~
\r
761 \begin_inset space ~
\r
769 \begin_inset space ~
\r
774 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
\r
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
779 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
\r
781 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
\r
790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
794 \begin_inset space ~
\r
799 will reload the document from disk.
\r
800 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
\r
801 and want to restore it to the last save.
\r
805 \begin_inset space ~
\r
810 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
\r
811 them as your changes.
\r
814 \begin_layout Section
\r
815 Basic Editing Features
\r
816 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
828 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
835 \begin_layout Standard
\r
836 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
\r
837 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
\r
838 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
\r
839 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
\r
841 We will start with cut and paste.
\r
844 \begin_layout Standard
\r
845 As you might expect, the
\r
849 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
\r
850 various other editing features.
\r
851 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
\r
852 The basic ones are:
\r
855 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
869 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
883 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
897 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
901 \begin_inset space ~
\r
907 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
911 \begin_inset space ~
\r
917 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
921 \begin_inset space ~
\r
925 \begin_inset space ~
\r
933 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
\r
939 \begin_layout Standard
\r
940 The first three are self-explanatory.
\r
942 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
951 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
\r
955 \begin_inset space ~
\r
960 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
\r
963 \begin_layout Standard
\r
966 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
968 \begin_inset space ~
\r
971 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
973 \begin_inset space ~
\r
977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
981 \begin_inset space ~
\r
986 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
\r
988 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
\r
992 \begin_inset space ~
\r
997 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
\r
998 will start a new paragraph.
\r
1001 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1002 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1023 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1025 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1029 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1041 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1047 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
\r
1052 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
\r
1055 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1061 You can click the
\r
1064 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1069 button to skip the current word.
\r
1073 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1078 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
\r
1082 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1087 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
\r
1089 If the toggle is set, searching for
\r
1090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1094 \family typewriter
\r
1098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1101 will not match the word
\r
1102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1106 \family typewriter
\r
1110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1116 Match whole words only
\r
1118 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
\r
1119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1122 g., searching for
\r
1123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1127 \family typewriter
\r
1131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1139 \family typewriter
\r
1143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1147 LyX offers also an advanced
\r
1150 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1154 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1159 feature that is described in sec.
\r
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1166 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
1173 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1174 Things like notes, floats, etc.
\r
1175 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1186 ) can be dissolved.
\r
1187 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
\r
1189 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
\r
1190 inset and pressing
\r
1194 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
\r
1201 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1202 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
\r
1205 arg "inset-select-all"
\r
1211 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
\r
1214 selects the whole document.
\r
1217 \begin_layout Section
\r
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1229 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1240 LatexCommand label
\r
1241 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
\r
1248 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1249 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
\r
1250 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
\r
1253 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1256 or the toolbar button
\r
1262 to undo some mistake.
\r
1263 If you accidentally undo too much, use
\r
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1268 or the toolbar button
\r
1275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1282 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
\r
1283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1286 steps to minimize memory overhead.
\r
1289 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1290 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
\r
1291 was last saved, the
\r
1292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1299 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
\r
1300 This is a consequence of the 100
\r
1301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1304 step undo limit mentioned above.
\r
1307 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1316 work on almost everything in LyX.
\r
1317 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
\r
1321 \begin_layout Section
\r
1323 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1335 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1336 These are the most basic mouse operations.
\r
1339 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1344 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1349 once anywhere in the edit window.
\r
1350 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
\r
1354 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1359 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1364 and drag the mouse.
\r
1365 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
\r
1368 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1371 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
\r
1374 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1375 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
\r
1377 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1384 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1385 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
\r
1389 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1390 Right-click on them to set their properties.
\r
1391 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
\r
1395 \begin_layout Section
\r
1397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1398 LatexCommand label
\r
1399 name "sec:Navigating"
\r
1404 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1416 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1417 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
\r
1420 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1425 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
\r
1426 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
\r
1429 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1430 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
\r
1432 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1435 or by the toolbar button
\r
1438 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
\r
1444 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1445 You can set bookmarks in your document under
\r
1447 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1450 and use the same menu to return to them.
\r
1451 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
\r
1454 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1455 The toolbar button
\r
1458 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
1463 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1464 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1466 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1471 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
\r
1472 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
\r
1473 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
\r
1474 your last editing position.
\r
1477 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1482 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
\r
1485 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
1487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1488 LatexCommand label
\r
1489 name "sub:The-Outliner"
\r
1496 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1497 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
\r
1498 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
\r
1499 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
\r
1501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1507 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
1511 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
\r
1512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1518 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
1523 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
\r
1527 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1528 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
\r
1529 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
\r
1530 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
\r
1531 dialog and to modify the citation.
\r
1534 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1535 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
\r
1537 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
\r
1538 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
\r
1539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1546 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
\r
1549 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1550 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
\r
1551 you further to control the display.
\r
1556 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
\r
1557 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
\r
1563 option keeps it in the current view state.
\r
1564 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
\r
1565 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1568 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
\r
1569 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1572 3, the subsections of sections
\r
1573 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1576 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
\r
1581 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
\r
1582 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1586 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
\r
1588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1596 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
\r
1599 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1601 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1605 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1606 filename ../images/reload.png
\r
1611 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1614 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
\r
1615 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
\r
1618 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1622 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1623 filename ../images/down.png
\r
1625 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1630 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1634 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1638 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1639 filename ../images/up.png
\r
1641 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1646 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1649 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
\r
1650 So, for example, you can move section
\r
1651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1654 2.5 before section
\r
1655 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1658 2.4 or after section
\r
1659 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1663 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
\r
1665 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1666 filename ../images/promote.png
\r
1668 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1673 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1674 filename ../images/demote.png
\r
1676 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1680 (or the corresponding key bindings
\r
1688 ) you can change the level of sections.
\r
1689 So you can for example make section
\r
1690 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1694 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1698 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1704 \begin_layout Section
\r
1705 Input/Word Completion
\r
1706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1707 LatexCommand label
\r
1708 name "sec:Input-Completion"
\r
1713 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1723 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1727 Word completion|see
\r
1731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1757 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1758 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
\r
1760 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
\r
1761 is used to propose completions.
\r
1764 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1765 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
\r
1767 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1772 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1779 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1783 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1788 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
\r
1792 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1797 the completions are always shown in a popup.
\r
1798 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
\r
1802 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1808 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
\r
1809 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
\r
1812 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1813 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
\r
1814 are completions available.
\r
1819 key to accept a proposed completion.
\r
1820 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
\r
1821 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
\r
1822 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
\r
1829 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1830 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
\r
1831 ing options for text.
\r
1832 The special math option
\r
1836 enables characters to be composed.
\r
1837 If, for example, you want to insert the character
\r
1838 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
\r
1841 , you can then input the characters
\r
1842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1853 to a formula to get it.
\r
1854 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
\r
1855 of the math toolbar.
\r
1856 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
\r
1857 \family typewriter
\r
1860 that is in LyX's installation folder.
\r
1861 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
\r
1870 \begin_layout Section
\r
1871 Basic Key Bindings
\r
1872 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1882 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1914 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1948 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1949 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
\r
1950 \family typewriter
\r
1954 \family typewriter
\r
1959 \family typewriter
\r
1962 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
\r
1964 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1968 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
\r
1969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1975 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
\r
1982 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1986 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1994 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2015 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
\r
2019 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2024 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2025 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2027 description "Tabulator key"
\r
2033 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
\r
2034 If you do not understand this, go read sections
\r
2035 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2041 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
\r
2046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2048 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
2052 , especially section
\r
2053 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2059 reference "sub:Lists"
\r
2065 If you are still confused, look in the
\r
2070 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
2077 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
\r
2078 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
\r
2082 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2087 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2088 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2090 description "Escape key"
\r
2097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2104 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
\r
2105 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
\r
2108 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2115 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2119 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2126 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
\r
2127 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
\r
2128 or end of the file.
\r
2131 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2132 There are three modifier keys:
\r
2135 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2154 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2155 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2157 description "Control key"
\r
2161 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
\r
2162 on which keys it is used in combination with:
\r
2166 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2175 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
\r
2178 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2187 , it moves by words instead of characters.
\r
2190 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2199 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
\r
2203 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2222 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2223 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2225 description "Shift key"
\r
2229 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
\r
2230 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
\r
2233 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2234 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2252 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2253 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2255 description "Alt or Meta key"
\r
2259 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
\r
2260 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
\r
2261 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
\r
2267 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
2270 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
\r
2272 menu accelerator keys
\r
2275 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
\r
2276 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
\r
2280 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2281 For example, the sequence
\r
2282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2288 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2292 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2298 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2325 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2341 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2346 manual lists all other things bound to the
\r
2354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2355 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
\r
2356 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
\r
2357 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
\r
2358 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
\r
2359 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
\r
2360 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
\r
2361 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
\r
2363 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
\r
2364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2379 followed by a capital
\r
2386 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
2388 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2400 \begin_layout Section
\r
2402 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2414 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
2418 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2419 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
\r
2420 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
\r
2421 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
\r
2422 numbering schemes, and so on.
\r
2423 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
\r
2424 and format the title of your document differently.
\r
2427 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2432 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
\r
2433 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
\r
2434 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
\r
2435 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
\r
2436 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
\r
2439 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
2441 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2445 Document ! Classes
\r
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2452 LatexCommand label
\r
2453 name "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
2460 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2461 You can select a class using the
\r
2463 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2464 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2468 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2472 Document ! Settings
\r
2478 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
\r
2482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2486 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2487 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
\r
2491 \begin_layout Description
\r
2492 Article for basic articles
\r
2495 \begin_layout Description
\r
2496 Report for basic reports
\r
2499 \begin_layout Description
\r
2500 Book for writing a book
\r
2503 \begin_layout Description
\r
2504 Letter for US-style letters
\r
2507 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2508 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
\r
2509 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
\r
2510 will include many of these.
\r
2511 Here are some of the classes.
\r
2512 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
\r
2514 Special Document Classes
\r
2518 Additional Features
\r
2523 \begin_layout Description
\r
2524 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
\r
2527 \begin_layout Description
\r
2528 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
\r
2532 \begin_layout Description
\r
2533 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
\r
2537 \begin_layout Description
\r
2538 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
\r
2539 Mathematical Society (AMS).
\r
2540 There are three article layouts available.
\r
2541 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
\r
2542 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
\r
2543 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
\r
2544 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
\r
2546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2549 sequential numbering
\r
2550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2553 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
\r
2554 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
\r
2555 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
\r
2556 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
\r
2559 \begin_layout Description
\r
2560 Beamer Layout for presentations
\r
2563 \begin_layout Description
\r
2564 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
\r
2565 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
\r
2569 \begin_layout Description
\r
2570 Chess Layout to write about chess games
\r
2573 \begin_layout Description
\r
2575 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2578 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
\r
2581 \begin_layout Description
\r
2582 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
\r
2585 \begin_layout Description
\r
2586 Foils Used to make transparencies
\r
2589 \begin_layout Description
\r
2590 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
\r
2591 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
\r
2595 \begin_layout Description
\r
2596 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
\r
2597 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
\r
2600 \begin_layout Description
\r
2601 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
\r
2604 \begin_layout Description
\r
2605 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
\r
2608 \begin_layout Description
\r
2609 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
\r
2610 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
\r
2611 (Is used by this document.)
\r
2614 \begin_layout Description
\r
2615 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
\r
2618 \begin_layout Description
\r
2619 Powerdot Layout for presentations
\r
2622 \begin_layout Description
\r
2627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2634 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
\r
2635 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
\r
2637 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
\r
2640 \begin_layout Description
\r
2641 Slides Used to make transparencies
\r
2644 \begin_layout Description
\r
2646 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2649 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
\r
2650 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
\r
2653 \begin_layout Description
\r
2654 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
\r
2657 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2658 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
\r
2660 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
\r
2663 Additional Features
\r
2666 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
\r
2667 of the document classes.
\r
2670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2674 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2675 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
\r
2677 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2678 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2680 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2684 Document ! Settings
\r
2692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2700 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
\r
2701 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
\r
2703 So it may seem that something is wrong.
\r
2706 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2708 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
\r
2709 and some of them, like
\r
2713 , are highly specialized.
\r
2714 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
\r
2715 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
\r
2717 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
\r
2718 by some document class.
\r
2719 There are just too many of them.
\r
2720 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
\r
2723 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2724 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
\r
2725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2732 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
\r
2733 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
\r
2734 document class for a new file.
\r
2735 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
\r
2737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2740 Installing new LaTeX files
\r
2741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2748 manual for information on how to install them.
\r
2749 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
2755 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2756 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
\r
2757 does not include support for every document class people might want to
\r
2759 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
\r
2760 dissertations submitted to those universities.
\r
2761 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
\r
2762 There are too many.
\r
2763 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
\r
2767 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
\r
2773 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
\r
2776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2779 LatexCommand label
\r
2780 name "sub:Modules"
\r
2785 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2789 Document ! Modules
\r
2797 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2798 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
\r
2799 chosen document class.
\r
2800 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
\r
2801 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
\r
2802 ing module in the
\r
2808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2812 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2816 Document ! Settings
\r
2822 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
\r
2826 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2827 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
\r
2828 always installed by default.
\r
2829 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
\r
2830 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
\r
2831 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
\r
2832 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
\r
2833 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
\r
2834 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
\r
2835 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
\r
2838 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2842 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2846 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
2852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2855 Installing new LaTeX files
\r
2856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2863 manual for more information on installing required packages.
\r
2866 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
2870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2875 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
\r
2876 LyX will advise you about these things.
\r
2884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2887 LatexCommand label
\r
2888 name "sub:Local-Layout"
\r
2893 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2897 Document ! Local Layout
\r
2905 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2906 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
\r
2907 used in a variety of different documents.
\r
2908 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
\r
2909 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
\r
2910 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
\r
2911 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
\r
2912 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
\r
2913 What you want is LyX's
\r
2914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2930 manual for information on how to use it.
\r
2933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2937 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2938 Each class has a default set of options.
\r
2939 Here's a quick table describing them:
\r
2942 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2943 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
2949 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2951 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
2952 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
\r
2953 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
2954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3412 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3413 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
3419 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3420 You're probably also wondering what
\r
3421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
3425 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
3433 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
\r
3434 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
\r
3439 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
\r
3444 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
\r
3454 headings, there are also
\r
3462 headings, and so on.
\r
3463 We will describe these headings fully in section
\r
3464 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3470 reference "sub:Headings"
\r
3477 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3480 LatexCommand label
\r
3481 name "sub:Document-Layout"
\r
3486 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3498 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3502 Document ! Settings
\r
3510 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3511 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
\r
3513 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3520 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3528 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3533 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
\r
3535 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
\r
3536 to use for your document.
\r
3537 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
\r
3538 to read its manual.
\r
3541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3545 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3552 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3558 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3563 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
\r
3564 You can choose between the following five options:
\r
3567 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3573 Use default page style of current class.
\r
3576 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3582 No page numbers or headings.
\r
3585 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3591 Page numbers only.
\r
3594 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3600 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
\r
3601 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
\r
3602 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
\r
3605 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3611 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
\r
3612 have the LaTeX-package
\r
3617 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3621 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
3627 How they are defined is explained in section
\r
3628 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3634 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
\r
3641 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3642 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
\r
3643 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3649 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
\r
3656 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3657 Paper Size and Orientation
\r
3658 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3662 Document ! Paper size
\r
3668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3669 LatexCommand label
\r
3670 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
\r
3677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3678 You can find the following options in the menu
\r
3681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3688 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3694 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3698 Document ! Settings
\r
3706 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3711 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3716 What size paper to print on.
\r
3721 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3727 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3733 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3739 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3745 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3748 US letter, US legal, US executive
\r
3751 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3757 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3764 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3770 To choose whether to output as
\r
3781 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3786 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3791 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
\r
3792 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
\r
3795 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3798 LatexCommand label
\r
3799 name "sub:Margins"
\r
3804 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3808 Document ! Margins
\r
3814 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3826 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3827 Paper margins are set in the menu
\r
3829 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3833 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3837 Document ! Settings
\r
3845 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3846 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
\r
3847 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
\r
3848 the paper format and the font size into account.
\r
3851 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3855 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3856 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
\r
3860 into the new class.
\r
3861 That includes the paragraph environments.
\r
3862 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
\r
3863 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
\r
3864 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
\r
3865 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
\r
3866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
3870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
3874 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
\r
3876 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
\r
3877 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
\r
3878 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
\r
3881 \begin_layout Section
\r
3882 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
\r
3883 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3887 Paragraph ! Indentation
\r
3895 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3898 LatexCommand label
\r
3899 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
\r
3906 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3907 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
\r
3908 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
\r
3911 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3912 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
\r
3913 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
\r
3914 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
\r
3915 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
\r
3919 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
\r
3925 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
\r
3926 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
\r
3927 language than English.
\r
3928 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
\r
3932 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3933 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
\r
3934 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
\r
3936 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
\r
3937 LyX takes care of that.
\r
3938 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
\r
3940 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
\r
3941 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
\r
3942 of a page, and so on.
\r
3946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3947 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
\r
3952 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
\r
3953 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
\r
3957 these pre-coded spacings.
\r
3958 We will explain more later.
\r
3961 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3962 Paragraph Separation
\r
3963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3964 LatexCommand label
\r
3965 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
\r
3970 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3974 Paragraph ! Separation
\r
3982 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3990 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4005 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4009 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4013 Document ! Settings
\r
4018 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
\r
4021 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4025 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4026 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
\r
4029 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4031 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4036 dialog and toggle the
\r
4039 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4044 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
\r
4047 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
\r
4051 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
\r
4052 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
\r
4056 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4057 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
\r
4058 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
\r
4061 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4063 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4067 Paragraph ! Line spacing
\r
4075 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4078 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4082 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4086 Document ! Settings
\r
4094 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
\r
4098 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4108 You need to have the LaTeX-package
\r
4113 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4117 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
\r
4122 installed to use this feature.
\r
4127 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
\r
4129 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4131 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4136 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
\r
4137 is normally defined in the environment's style.
\r
4140 \begin_layout Section
\r
4141 Paragraph Environments
\r
4142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4143 LatexCommand label
\r
4144 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4153 Paragraph ! Environments
\r
4159 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4163 Paragraph environments|(
\r
4171 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4175 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4176 Paragraph environments correspond to the
\r
4179 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4198 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
4201 command sequence in LaTeX files.
\r
4202 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
\r
4203 alien to you, we urge you to read the
\r
4212 also contains many more examples than this section does.
\r
4215 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4216 A paragraph environment is simply a
\r
4217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4224 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
\r
4225 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
\r
4226 scheme, labels, and so on.
\r
4227 Additionally, you can
\r
4228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4235 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
\r
4236 to inherit some of the properties of another.
\r
4237 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
\r
4238 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
\r
4240 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
\r
4242 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
\r
4245 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4246 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
\r
4247 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
4248 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
\r
4254 at the left end of the toolbar.
\r
4255 LyX will change the environment of the
\r
4259 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
\r
4260 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
\r
4261 you select them before choosing the new environment.
\r
4265 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4266 Note that entering
\r
4274 create a new paragraph using the
\r
4278 paragraph environment.
\r
4280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4287 because if you are in one of these environments:
\r
4290 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4296 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4302 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4308 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4314 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4320 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4326 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4332 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4333 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
\r
4337 , rather than resetting it to
\r
4342 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
\r
4343 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
4349 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
4356 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4360 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4361 The default paragraph environment is
\r
4366 It creates a plain paragraph.
\r
4367 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
\r
4368 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
\r
4369 this manual) are in the
\r
4376 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4377 You can nest a paragraph using the
\r
4381 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
\r
4389 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4403 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4404 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
\r
4406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4413 for thanks or contact information.
\r
4414 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
\r
4415 page along with today's date.
\r
4416 For other types of documents, the title
\r
4417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4424 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
\r
4428 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4429 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
\r
4443 Here's how you use them:
\r
4446 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4447 Put the title of your document in the
\r
4454 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4455 Put the author name in the
\r
4462 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4463 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
\r
4464 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
\r
4470 Note that using this environment is optional.
\r
4471 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
\r
4472 If you don't want a date, use the option
\r
4474 Suppress default date on front page
\r
4478 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4479 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4481 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4489 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4490 You can use footnotes to insert
\r
4491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4498 or contact information.
\r
4501 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4503 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4514 LatexCommand label
\r
4515 name "sub:Headings"
\r
4522 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4523 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
\r
4524 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
\r
4527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4529 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4533 Section headings ! Numbered
\r
4541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4542 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
\r
4546 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4552 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4558 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4564 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4570 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4576 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4582 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4588 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4589 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
\r
4590 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
\r
4591 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
\r
4594 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4595 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
\r
4596 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
\r
4597 You group the book into chapters.
\r
4598 LyX does a similar grouping:
\r
4601 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4606 is divided into either
\r
4617 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4622 s are divided into
\r
4629 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4634 s are divided into
\r
4641 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4646 s are divided into
\r
4653 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4658 s are divided into
\r
4665 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4670 s are divided into
\r
4677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4678 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
4681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4686 Not all document types use the
\r
4690 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
\r
4695 is the top-level heading.
\r
4703 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4704 So, if you use the
\r
4708 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
\r
4709 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
\r
4711 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
\r
4713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4724 Unnumbered Headings
\r
4725 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4729 Section headings ! Unnumbered
\r
4737 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4738 The unnumbered section headings have a
\r
4739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4746 at the end of their name.
\r
4747 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
\r
4748 the table of contents, see section
\r
4749 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
4755 reference "sec:toc"
\r
4762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4763 Changing the Numbering
\r
4764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4765 LatexCommand label
\r
4766 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
4773 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4774 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
\r
4775 in the Table of Contents.
\r
4776 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
\r
4778 Just as certain classes start with
\r
4782 and go down to the
\r
4792 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
\r
4793 Most don't number
\r
4802 This is something you can change.
\r
4805 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4812 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4816 Document ! Settings
\r
4824 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4833 you will see two counters.
\r
4838 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
\r
4840 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
\r
4844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4845 Short Titles of Headings
\r
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4850 Section headings ! Short titles
\r
4856 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
4859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4867 LatexCommand label
\r
4868 name "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
4875 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4876 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
\r
4877 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
\r
4878 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
\r
4879 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
\r
4882 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4883 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
\r
4884 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
\r
4885 avoiding the problem mentioned.
\r
4886 To specify a short title, use the menu
\r
4888 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4890 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4896 This will insert a box labeled
\r
4897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4912 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
\r
4913 This also works for captions inside floats.
\r
4916 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4917 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
\r
4920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4921 Special Information
\r
4924 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4925 The following information applies to all section headings:
\r
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4929 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
\r
4932 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4933 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
\r
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4937 You can only use inline math in these environments.
\r
4940 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4941 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
\r
4944 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4945 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
\r
4948 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4949 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
\r
4963 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
\r
4964 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
\r
4965 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
\r
4966 the text they contain.
\r
4967 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
\r
4975 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
\r
4978 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4979 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
\r
4988 when you start a new paragraph.
\r
4989 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
\r
4993 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
\r
4994 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
\r
4995 have to change back to the
\r
4999 environment yourself.
\r
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5013 LatexCommand label
\r
5019 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5031 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5032 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
\r
5033 time for the differences.
\r
5042 are identical except for one difference:
\r
5046 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
\r
5055 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
\r
5058 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5059 Here's an example of the
\r
5066 \begin_layout Quote
\r
5072 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
\r
5074 See – no indentation!
\r
5077 \begin_layout Quote
\r
5078 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
\r
5079 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
\r
5080 the other paragraph.
\r
5083 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5084 Here's another example, this time in the
\r
5091 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
5097 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
\r
5098 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
\r
5099 the first line, then
\r
5103 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
\r
5107 you were quoting other text.
\r
5110 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
5111 Here's a new paragraph.
\r
5112 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
\r
5113 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
\r
5116 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5117 As the examples show,
\r
5121 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
\r
5122 They should put quotes in the
\r
5127 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
\r
5131 paragraph environment for quoted text.
\r
5134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5140 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5152 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5163 LatexCommand label
\r
5171 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5176 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
\r
5177 Here's an example:
\r
5180 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5182 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5185 Which I did not rehearse!
\r
5188 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5189 It could be much worse.
\r
5190 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
\r
5192 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
\r
5193 indented a bit more than the first.
\r
5194 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
\r
5198 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5200 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5203 And make things look fine
\r
5204 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5210 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
5216 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5221 does not indent both margins.
\r
5222 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
\r
5223 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
\r
5224 \family typewriter
\r
5230 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
5236 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
5238 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5249 LatexCommand label
\r
5257 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5258 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
\r
5268 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
\r
5277 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
\r
5278 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
\r
5279 describing some general features of all four of them.
\r
5282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5286 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5287 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
\r
5289 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
\r
5298 reset the environment to
\r
5302 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
\r
5303 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
\r
5304 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
\r
5305 depth, you can use
\r
5308 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
5312 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
\r
5319 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5320 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
\r
5321 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
\r
5323 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
\r
5324 you read all of section
\r
5325 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5331 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5344 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5355 LatexCommand label
\r
5356 name "sec:Itemize"
\r
5363 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5364 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
\r
5368 paragraph environment.
\r
5369 It has the following properties:
\r
5372 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5373 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
\r
5377 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5378 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
\r
5381 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5382 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
\r
5386 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5387 The items can have any length.
\r
5388 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
\r
5389 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
\r
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5401 environment inside another
\r
5405 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
\r
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5410 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
\r
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5414 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
\r
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5419 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5425 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5429 for a full explanation of nesting.
\r
5433 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5434 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
\r
5443 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
\r
5446 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5447 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
\r
5448 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
\r
5451 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5452 The label for the first level
\r
5456 is a large black dot, or bullet.
\r
5460 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5461 The label for the second level is a dash.
\r
5465 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5466 The label for the third is an asterisk.
\r
5470 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5471 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
\r
5475 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5476 Back out to the third level.
\r
5480 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5481 Back to the second level.
\r
5485 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5486 Back to the outermost level.
\r
5489 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5490 These are the default labels for an
\r
5495 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
\r
5497 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5500 dialog in the submenu
\r
5505 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5509 Document ! Settings
\r
5514 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
\r
5517 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5518 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
\r
5519 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
\r
5521 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5527 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5540 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5551 LatexCommand label
\r
5552 name "sec:Enumerate"
\r
5559 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5564 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
\r
5565 It has these properties:
\r
5568 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5569 Each item has a numeral as its label.
\r
5573 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5574 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
\r
5578 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5579 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
\r
5582 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5587 environment resets the counter to one.
\r
5590 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5603 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5604 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
\r
5605 Items can have any length.
\r
5608 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5609 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
\r
5612 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5613 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
\r
5616 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5617 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
\r
5621 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5630 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
\r
5631 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
\r
5638 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5639 The first level of an
\r
5643 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
\r
5647 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5648 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
\r
5652 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5653 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
\r
5657 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5658 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
\r
5661 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5662 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
\r
5667 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5668 Back to the third level
\r
5672 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5673 Back to the second level.
\r
5677 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5678 Back to the outermost level.
\r
5681 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5682 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
\r
5686 environment, see section
\r
5687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5693 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
\r
5698 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
\r
5701 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5702 There is more to nesting
\r
5706 environments than we've stated here.
\r
5707 You should read section
\r
5708 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5714 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5718 to learn more about nesting.
\r
5721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5727 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5731 Lists ! Description
\r
5739 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5740 Unlike the previous two environments, the
\r
5744 list has no fixed label.
\r
5745 Instead, LyX uses the first
\r
5746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5753 of the first line as the label.
\r
5754 Here's an example:
\r
5757 \begin_layout Description
\r
5758 Example: This is an example of the
\r
5765 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5766 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
\r
5770 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5779 it is meant that the first usage of the
\r
5783 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
\r
5785 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
\r
5793 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
5798 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5799 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5801 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5807 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5813 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
5817 for more information.) Here is an example:
\r
5820 \begin_layout Description
\r
5822 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5825 Example: This one shows how to use a
\r
5828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5833 in the label of a
\r
5840 \begin_layout Description
\r
5841 Usage: You should use the
\r
5845 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
\r
5846 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
\r
5847 that describes it.
\r
5848 It's not a good idea to use a
\r
5852 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
\r
5853 You're better off using
\r
5861 and nesting several
\r
5865 paragraphs into them.
\r
5868 \begin_layout Description
\r
5869 Nesting: You can nest
\r
5873 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
\r
5877 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5878 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
\r
5879 them from the first line.
\r
5882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5884 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5896 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5901 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
\r
5904 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5913 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
\r
5915 Here are its properties:
\r
5918 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5921 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5924 labels LyX uses the first
\r
5925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5932 of each line as the item label.
\r
5937 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
\r
5938 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
\r
5939 space as described above.
\r
5942 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5944 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
\r
5945 the body of the item text.
\r
5946 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
\r
5947 label width plus a little extra space.
\r
5951 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5954 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5957 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
\r
5959 If the label width is larger, the label
\r
5960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5967 into the first line.
\r
5968 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
\r
5969 margin of the rest of the item text.
\r
5972 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5975 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5978 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
\r
5983 environment has the same left margin.
\r
5984 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5987 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
\r
5990 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5992 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5997 dialog (toolbar button
\r
6000 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
6004 The text in the box
\r
6007 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6012 determines the default label width.
\r
6013 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
\r
6015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6022 multiple times instead.
\r
6023 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
\r
6025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6032 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
\r
6035 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6040 every time you alter a label in a
\r
6045 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6048 The predefined default width is the length of
\r
6049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6057 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6063 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6064 You should use the
\r
6068 list the same way as the
\r
6072 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
\r
6078 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
\r
6082 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6087 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
\r
6088 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
\r
6090 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6096 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
6100 to learn about nesting.
\r
6103 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6104 There is yet another feature of the
\r
6108 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
\r
6110 You can use additional
\r
6114 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
\r
6119 are documented in section
\r
6120 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6126 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
6131 Here are some examples:
\r
6134 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6136 Left The default for
\r
6143 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6145 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6152 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
\r
6155 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6157 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6161 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6168 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
\r
6171 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
6173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
6174 LatexCommand label
\r
6175 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
\r
6180 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6184 Lists ! Customized
\r
6192 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6193 The features described in this section require that the module
\r
6195 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
\r
6197 is loaded in the document settings.
\r
6198 The module uses the LaTeX-package
\r
6203 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6207 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6216 Custom Enumerate Lists
\r
6217 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6221 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
\r
6229 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6231 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
\r
6234 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
6237 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
\r
6238 There you add the command
\r
6241 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6249 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6250 in TeX Code (shortcut
\r
6260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6261 For more about TeX Code, look at section
\r
6262 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6268 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
6281 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
\r
6288 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
\r
6289 For capital Roman numerals replace
\r
6301 in the command above.
\r
6302 For Arabic numerals use
\r
6310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6317 items with capital or small Latin letters use
\r
6332 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6334 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6342 You can only number 26
\r
6343 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6346 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
\r
6354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6355 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
\r
6356 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
\r
6359 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6360 Here is a list with custom numbering:
\r
6363 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6364 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6393 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6394 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6420 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6425 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6426 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6453 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6454 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6483 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6484 For this list these commands were used:
\r
6487 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6498 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6506 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6524 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6525 where the command
\r
6531 makes the label emphasized and
\r
6540 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6549 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
\r
6550 lists until you change the definition.
\r
6558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6559 Resumed Enumeration
\r
6560 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6564 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
\r
6572 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6573 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
\r
6576 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6577 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6599 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
6602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6603 goes back to default numbering
\r
6611 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6615 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6619 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
\r
6623 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6624 To resume an enumeration, use the style
\r
6629 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
\r
6630 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
\r
6633 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6634 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6642 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
\r
6650 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6651 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
\r
6653 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
\r
6654 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
\r
6655 of a normal enumeration.
\r
6656 There, insert the command
\r
6659 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6665 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6670 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
\r
6674 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6678 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6682 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6683 Enumeration starting at a given value:
\r
6686 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6687 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6706 This enumeration starts at 4
\r
6709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6711 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6723 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6724 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
\r
6726 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
\r
6729 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6733 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6734 with standard spacing
\r
6737 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6738 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
\r
6740 Add there the command
\r
6744 to get no additional list space like in this example:
\r
6747 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6748 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6770 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6771 without additional
\r
6774 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6778 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6779 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
6785 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6789 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6795 For more information see its documentation,
\r
6796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
6805 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6806 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
\r
6808 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
\r
6809 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
\r
6810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
6813 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
\r
6816 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6817 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6828 parindent, labelsep=2cm
\r
6841 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6842 with negative indentation
\r
6845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6846 Further Customization
\r
6847 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6851 Lists ! Customization
\r
6859 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6860 You can also change the style of description lists.
\r
6864 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6870 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6871 changes the description label font, the command
\r
6874 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6880 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6881 sets the list style.
\r
6884 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6885 An example where the command
\r
6888 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6893 itshape, style=nextline
\r
6896 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6900 \begin_layout Description
\r
6902 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6906 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6915 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
\r
6917 itshape, style=nextline
\r
6927 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
\r
6928 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
\r
6932 \begin_layout Description
\r
6934 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6937 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
\r
6938 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
\r
6939 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
\r
6942 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6943 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
6949 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6953 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6959 For more information see its documentation
\r
6960 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
6969 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
6971 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6991 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6999 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7000 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
\r
7001 environments called
\r
7008 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7014 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
\r
7015 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
\r
7016 In contrast, you can use the
\r
7023 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7028 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
\r
7029 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
\r
7033 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7034 Of course, you're not limited to using
\r
7041 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7050 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7055 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
\r
7056 some European academic papers.
\r
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7062 LatexCommand label
\r
7063 name "sec:Address-Usage"
\r
7070 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7075 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
\r
7076 for the opening and signature in some countries.
\r
7080 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7085 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
\r
7086 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
\r
7087 Here's an example of each:
\r
7090 \begin_layout Right Address
\r
7092 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7096 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7100 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7103 When is it? What is today?
\r
7106 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7110 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7116 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
\r
7117 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
\r
7118 Here's an example of the
\r
7125 \begin_layout Address
\r
7127 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7130 Where do I send this
\r
7131 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7134 Your post office and country
\r
7137 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7138 As you can see, both
\r
7145 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7150 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
\r
7155 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
\r
7156 the environment to
\r
7161 This makes sense, since
\r
7166 \family typewriter
\r
7169 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
\r
7170 Thus, you have to use
\r
7171 \family typewriter
\r
7177 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7182 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7183 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7185 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7189 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7194 ) to start a new line in an
\r
7201 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7209 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7213 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7214 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
\r
7215 or list of references.
\r
7216 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
\r
7219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7223 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7235 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7240 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
\r
7241 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
\r
7242 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
\r
7243 Also, don't bother trying to nest
\r
7247 in anything else or
\r
7257 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
\r
7258 The book document classes ignores the
\r
7262 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
\r
7266 in a letter document class.
\r
7269 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7274 environment does several things for you.
\r
7275 First, it puts the centered label
\r
7276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7284 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
\r
7286 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
\r
7287 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
\r
7288 the subsequent text.
\r
7289 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
\r
7290 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
\r
7294 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7295 Starting a new paragraph by entering
\r
7299 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7300 The new paragraph will still be in the
\r
7305 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
\r
7306 finish entering the abstract of your document.
\r
7309 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7310 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7317 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
7318 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
\r
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7326 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7330 LatexCommand label
\r
7331 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
\r
7352 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7353 We would love to demonstrate the
\r
7357 environment, but since this document is in the
\r
7358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7365 class, we can't do this.
\r
7366 We inserted it therefore as figure
\r
7367 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
7373 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
\r
7378 If you have never heard of an
\r
7379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7386 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
\r
7389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7395 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7406 LatexCommand label
\r
7407 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
\r
7414 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7419 environment is used to list references.
\r
7420 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
\r
7421 only use it at the end of the document.
\r
7426 in anything else or
\r
7433 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7434 When you first open a
\r
7438 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
\r
7439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7454 depending on the document class.
\r
7455 The heading is in a large boldface font.
\r
7456 Each paragraph of the
\r
7460 environment is a bibliography entry.
\r
7465 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7466 Each new paragraph is still in the
\r
7473 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7474 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
\r
7475 by using a BibTeX database.
\r
7476 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
\r
7477 phy handling, have a look at section
\r
7478 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
7484 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
7491 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7495 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7499 Paragraph ! LyX code
\r
7505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7506 LatexCommand label
\r
7507 name "sub:LyX-Code"
\r
7514 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7519 environment is another LyX extension.
\r
7520 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
\r
7521 It also treats the
\r
7525 key as a fixed whitespace;
\r
7529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7538 key is treated as a
\r
7541 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7546 instead of an end-of-word marker.
\r
7551 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
\r
7552 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
\r
7555 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7559 \family typewriter
\r
7567 breaks paragraphs.
\r
7568 Note, however, that
\r
7572 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7573 So, when you finish using the
\r
7577 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
\r
7578 Also, you can nest the
\r
7582 environment inside of others.
\r
7585 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7586 There are a few quirks with this environment:
\r
7589 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7593 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7596 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
\r
7597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
7601 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
7611 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7617 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7618 You can't follow a
\r
7621 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7632 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7637 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
\r
7644 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7648 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
7655 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7656 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
\r
7657 You must put at least one
\r
7661 in any line you want blank.
\r
7662 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
\r
7665 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7666 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
\r
7670 since that will insert
\r
7675 You get the typewriter double quotes with
\r
7678 arg "self-insert \""
\r
7684 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7685 Here is an example:
\r
7688 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7689 #include <stdio.h>
\r
7692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7704 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7705 printf("Hello World!
\r
7710 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7714 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7718 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7719 This is just the standard
\r
7720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7731 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7736 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
\r
7737 rc-files, and so on.
\r
7738 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
\r
7739 as if you used a typewriter.
\r
7740 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7744 Paragraph environments|)
\r
7749 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
\r
7752 Program Code Listings
\r
7757 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7765 \begin_layout Section
\r
7766 Nesting Environments
\r
7767 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7771 Nesting ! Environments
\r
7777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7778 LatexCommand label
\r
7779 name "sec:Nesting"
\r
7786 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7790 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7791 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
\r
7793 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
\r
7795 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
\r
7796 has two subpoints.
\r
7797 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
\r
7799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7809 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7813 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7818 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7822 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7827 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7831 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7832 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
\r
7833 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
\r
7835 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7837 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7841 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7849 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7853 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7858 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
\r
7860 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
\r
7863 arg "depth-increment"
\r
7869 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
7872 or the key bindings
\r
7883 arg "depth-increment"
\r
7889 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
7893 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
\r
7894 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
\r
7898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7899 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
\r
7900 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
\r
7901 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
\r
7902 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
\r
7905 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7906 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
\r
7907 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
\r
7908 about to find out.
\r
7909 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
\r
7912 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7913 What You Can and Can't Nest
\r
7916 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7917 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
\r
7918 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
\r
7921 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7922 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
\r
7923 than a simple yes or no.
\r
7924 There are three types of paragraph environments:
\r
7927 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7928 Completely unnestable
\r
7931 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7932 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
\r
7933 things inside them.
\r
7936 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7937 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
\r
7938 anything into them.
\r
7941 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7942 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
\r
7943 environments have them:
\r
7946 \begin_layout Description
\r
7947 Unnestable Can't nest them.
\r
7948 Can't nest into them.
\r
7952 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7958 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7964 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7970 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7976 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7983 \begin_layout Description
\r
7985 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7988 Nestable You can nest them.
\r
7989 You can nest other things into them.
\r
7993 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7999 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8005 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8011 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8017 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8023 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8029 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8035 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8042 \begin_layout Description
\r
8043 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
\r
8044 You can't nest anything into them.
\r
8048 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8054 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8060 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8066 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8078 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8084 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8090 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8096 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8102 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8108 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8114 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8130 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8136 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8143 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8144 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
8147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8152 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
\r
8162 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8165 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
\r
8166 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
\r
8167 nested section headings violate this.
\r
8175 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8176 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
\r
8177 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
8180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8181 Nesting ! Tables etc.
\r
8189 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8190 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
\r
8191 affected by nesting anyhow.
\r
8195 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8199 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8203 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8207 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
8212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8217 Figures and tables in
\r
8221 are not affected by this.
\r
8226 Have a look at section
\r
8227 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
8233 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
8237 for more information about
\r
8244 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8245 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
\r
8246 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
\r
8250 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8251 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
\r
8252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8259 of its own, it behaves just like a
\r
8260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8267 paragraph environment.
\r
8268 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
\r
8272 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8273 Here's an example with a table:
\r
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8281 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8282 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8286 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8287 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8293 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8295 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8297 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8383 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8384 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8391 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8393 The table is actually nested inside (a).
\r
8397 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8401 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8402 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
\r
8405 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8411 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8415 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8416 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8422 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8424 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8425 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8426 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8427 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8428 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8512 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8513 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8519 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8525 nested inside (a).
\r
8526 In fact, it's not nested at all.
\r
8529 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8533 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8534 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
\r
8535 item of a new list!
\r
8538 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8539 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
\r
8541 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
\r
8544 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8549 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8550 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8553 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8554 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8560 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8562 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8563 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8564 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8651 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8652 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8658 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8660 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
\r
8667 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8671 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8672 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
\r
8678 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
\r
8679 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
\r
8683 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8684 Usage and General Features
\r
8687 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8688 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
\r
8690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8697 is the innermost possible depth.
\r
8698 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
\r
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8702 level #1 – outermost
\r
8706 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8711 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8716 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8735 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8736 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
\r
8737 both of them in the example.
\r
8738 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
\r
8748 For example, if we tried to nest another
\r
8753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8760 , we would get errors.
\r
8763 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8765 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
8768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8769 Nesting ! Examples
\r
8777 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8778 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
\r
8779 We have several examples of nested environments.
\r
8780 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
\r
8784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
8785 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
\r
8788 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8789 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8790 #1-a This is the outermost level.
\r
8799 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8800 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8801 #2-a This is level #2.
\r
8802 We created it by using
\r
8805 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8811 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8818 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8819 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8820 #3-a This is level #3.
\r
8821 This time, we just enter
\r
8828 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8832 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
\r
8836 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8842 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8849 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8850 This is actually a
\r
8854 environment, nested inside of
\r
8855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8863 So, it's at level #4.
\r
8864 We did this by entering
\r
8867 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8873 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8876 , then changing the paragraph environment to
\r
8881 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
\r
8897 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8902 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
\r
8905 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8911 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8912 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8913 #4-a This is level #4.
\r
8917 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8920 and changed the paragraph environment back to
\r
8925 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
\r
8929 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
\r
8934 keep nesting things inside
\r
8935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8946 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8947 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8948 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
8953 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8954 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8955 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
8956 and this is level #6.
\r
8957 By now, you should know how we made these two.
\r
8961 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8962 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8963 #5-b Back to level #5.
\r
8967 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8973 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
8980 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8981 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8982 #4-b After another
\r
8985 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8991 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
8994 , we're back at level #4.
\r
8998 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8999 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9000 #3-b Back to level #3.
\r
9001 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
\r
9005 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9006 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9007 #2-b Back to level #2.
\r
9012 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9013 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9014 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
\r
9015 After this sentence, we will enter
\r
9019 and change the paragraph environment back to
\r
9026 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9027 We could have also used the
\r
9043 environment in place of the
\r
9048 The example would have worked exactly the same.
\r
9051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9052 Example 2: Inheritance
\r
9055 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
9056 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
\r
9059 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
9061 Now we will enter
\r
9068 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9072 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9075 which, we will change to the
\r
9083 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9088 environment, at level #2.
\r
9091 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9092 Notice how the nested
\r
9096 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
\r
9100 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
\r
9104 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9105 We ended this example by entering
\r
9110 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
\r
9114 and reset the nesting depth by using
\r
9117 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9124 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
\r
9133 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
9136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9137 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
\r
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9146 This is level #1, in an
\r
9150 paragraph environment.
\r
9151 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
\r
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9160 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9166 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9170 Now, what happens if we nest an
\r
9174 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
\r
9175 label be? An asterisk?
\r
9179 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
9180 No! It's a bullet.
\r
9189 environment, even though it's at level #3.
\r
9190 So, its label is a bullet.
\r
9191 (We got here by using
\r
9194 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9200 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9203 , then changing the environment to
\r
9211 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
9212 Here's level #4, produced using
\r
9215 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9221 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9225 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
9230 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9231 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
9232 to get to level #5.
\r
9233 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
\r
9238 Notice the type of numbering, it is
\r
9242 , because we are in the
\r
9250 environment (that is, it is an
\r
9265 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9266 What happens if we
\r
9270 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
\r
9271 type of numbering does LyX use?
\r
9274 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9275 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
\r
9278 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9281 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
\r
9284 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9288 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9291 to decrease the depth after the next
\r
9294 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9301 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9303 Look what type of label LyX is using!
\r
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9309 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
\r
9310 numeral as the label.Why?
\r
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9314 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
\r
9323 Notice, however, that LyX
\r
9327 reset the counter for the label.
\r
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9335 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9341 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9344 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
\r
9345 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
\r
9346 into the twofold-nested
\r
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9355 The same thing happens if we do another
\r
9358 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9364 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9367 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
\r
9370 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9371 Lastly, we reset the environment to
\r
9376 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
\r
9386 The number of other
\r
9390 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
\r
9396 The same rule applies for the
\r
9400 environment, as well.
\r
9403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9404 Example 4: Going Bonkers
\r
9407 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9408 We're going to go totally nuts now.
\r
9409 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
\r
9410 the same detail with how we did it.
\r
9419 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9427 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9434 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
\r
9435 the example in parentheses someplace.
\r
9436 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
\r
9437 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
\r
9438 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
\r
9442 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9447 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
\r
9451 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9452 Now we will add verse.
\r
9453 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9456 It will get much worse.
\r
9457 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9467 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9477 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9478 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
\r
9479 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9482 Bippitey boppitey boo!
\r
9483 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9489 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9497 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9498 Here comes a table:
\r
9502 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9503 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
9509 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9511 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
9512 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
9513 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
9514 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
9515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
9517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
9520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9600 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9604 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9614 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9620 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9630 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9637 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9642 : level #1) This is another item.
\r
9643 Note that selecting a
\r
9647 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
\r
9648 3 times to put the table inside the
\r
9656 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9657 We're now ending the
\r
9661 list and changing to
\r
9666 We're still at level #1.
\r
9667 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
\r
9668 The next set of paragraphs is a
\r
9669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9676 We will nest both the
\r
9683 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9688 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
\r
9692 for the letter body.
\r
9696 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9699 to preserve the depth.
\r
9700 Remember that you need to use
\r
9703 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
9706 to create multiple lines inside the
\r
9713 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9723 \begin_layout Right Address
\r
9725 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9728 Moosegroin, MT 00100
\r
9729 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9735 \begin_layout Address
\r
9737 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9743 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9744 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
\r
9745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
9748 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
\r
9749 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
\r
9750 a backlog in our orders for methane.
\r
9751 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
\r
9752 as soon as possible.
\r
9753 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
\r
9756 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9757 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
\r
9758 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
\r
9759 with your order, along with payment.
\r
9762 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9763 We thank you again for your patience.
\r
9766 \begin_layout Address
\r
9768 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9775 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9776 That ends that example!
\r
9779 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9780 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
\r
9781 just a few keystrokes.
\r
9782 We could have easily nested an
\r
9803 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
\r
9806 \begin_layout Section
\r
9807 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
\r
9808 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9820 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9821 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
\r
9822 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
\r
9823 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
\r
9824 be broken at the end of a line.
\r
9825 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
\r
9829 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
9831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9832 LatexCommand label
\r
9833 name "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
9838 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9842 Spaces ! Protected
\r
9850 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9851 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
\r
9852 line at that point.
\r
9853 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
\r
9856 \begin_layout Quote
\r
9857 Further documentation is given in section
\r
9858 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9864 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
9872 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9873 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
\r
9874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9888 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
9893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9897 A protected space is set with
\r
9899 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9900 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9902 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9910 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
9916 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
9918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9919 LatexCommand label
\r
9920 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
9925 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9929 Spacing ! Horizontal
\r
9937 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9938 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
\r
9940 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9941 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9945 The length units are listed in Appendix
\r
9946 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9952 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
9959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9962 LatexCommand label
\r
9963 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
9968 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9972 Spaces ! Inter-word
\r
9980 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9981 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
\r
9982 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
\r
9983 at the ends of sentences.
\r
9984 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
\r
9985 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
\r
9986 followed by a period; see section
\r
9987 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9993 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
9998 To insert a normal space, select
\r
10000 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10001 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10003 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10009 \begin_inset Info
\r
10011 arg "space-insert normal"
\r
10017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10020 LatexCommand label
\r
10021 name "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
10026 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10038 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10047 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
\r
10048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10056 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
\r
10057 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
\r
10058 inside abbreviations:
\r
10061 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10067 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
\r
10070 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10071 or between values and units.
\r
10072 Compare for example this:
\r
10073 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10081 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10084 10 kg (normal space
\r
10087 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10088 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
\r
10090 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10091 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10093 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10099 \begin_inset Info
\r
10101 arg "space-insert thin"
\r
10107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10111 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10112 You can also insert the following space types:
\r
10115 \begin_layout Description
\r
10117 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10121 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10124 space A line with a
\r
10125 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10129 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
\r
10133 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10136 negative thin space between the arrows.
\r
10139 \begin_layout Description
\r
10141 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10148 em) A line with an
\r
10149 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10153 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
\r
10157 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10161 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10168 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10171 \begin_layout Description
\r
10173 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10180 em) A line with a
\r
10181 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10185 \begin_inset space \quad{}
\r
10189 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10193 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10200 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10203 \begin_layout Description
\r
10205 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10212 em) A line with a
\r
10213 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10217 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
\r
10221 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10225 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10232 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10235 \begin_layout Description
\r
10237 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10240 space A line with
\r
10241 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10245 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
\r
10250 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10257 cm space between the arrows.
\r
10260 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10262 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
10268 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
\r
10272 lists the different space sizes.
\r
10275 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10276 \begin_inset Float table
\r
10281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10283 \begin_inset Caption
\r
10285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10287 LatexCommand label
\r
10288 name "tab:Width-of-the"
\r
10292 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
\r
10300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10302 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
10303 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
\r
10304 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
10305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
\r
10306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
\r
10308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10309 \begin_inset Text
\r
10311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10320 \begin_inset Text
\r
10322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10333 \begin_inset Text
\r
10335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10342 \begin_inset Text
\r
10344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10357 \begin_inset Text
\r
10359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10366 \begin_inset Text
\r
10368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10381 \begin_inset Text
\r
10383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10390 \begin_inset Text
\r
10392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10405 \begin_inset Text
\r
10407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10414 \begin_inset Text
\r
10416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10429 \begin_inset Text
\r
10431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10442 \begin_inset Text
\r
10444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10457 \begin_inset Text
\r
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10470 \begin_inset Text
\r
10472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10485 \begin_inset Text
\r
10487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10498 \begin_inset Text
\r
10500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10529 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10542 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
\r
10543 in a uniform fashion.
\r
10544 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
\r
10545 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
\r
10546 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
\r
10547 equally between themselves.
\r
10550 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10551 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
\r
10554 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10556 This is on the left side
\r
10557 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10560 This is on the right
\r
10563 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10566 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10570 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10576 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10579 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10583 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10587 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10593 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10594 That was an example in the
\r
10600 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10608 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10611 is one in a standard paragraph.
\r
10612 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
\r
10616 sitting in-between the two arrows.
\r
10619 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10620 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
\r
10623 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10628 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
\r
10631 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10633 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
\r
10637 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10643 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10645 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
\r
10649 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10655 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10657 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
\r
10661 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10667 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10669 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
\r
10673 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10679 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10681 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
\r
10685 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10691 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10693 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
\r
10697 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10703 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
10707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10712 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
\r
10716 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
\r
10717 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
\r
10718 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
\r
10722 option in the space dialog.
\r
10730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10733 LatexCommand label
\r
10734 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
10739 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10743 Spacing ! Phantom
\r
10751 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10752 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
\r
10753 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
\r
10756 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10757 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
10760 What is correct English?:
\r
10761 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10765 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10769 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10772 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
\r
10773 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10777 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
10780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10788 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10792 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10803 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
10809 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10811 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
\r
10812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10816 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10820 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10828 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
\r
10830 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10831 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10835 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
\r
10836 lines and insert
\r
10837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10841 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10845 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10852 into the phantom inset (note the space after
\r
10853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10861 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
\r
10862 That is why it is named
\r
10863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10871 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
\r
10872 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
\r
10876 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
10878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10879 LatexCommand label
\r
10880 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
\r
10885 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10889 Spacing ! Vertical
\r
10897 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10898 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
\r
10900 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10901 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10903 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10909 There you find the following sizes:
\r
10912 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10925 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
\r
10930 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
\r
10932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10933 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10935 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10941 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10945 Document ! Settings
\r
10950 for the paragraph separation.
\r
10951 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
\r
10962 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10968 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10977 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
\r
10978 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
\r
10983 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
\r
10984 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
\r
10993 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
\r
10994 \begin_inset Foot
\r
10997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11002 s are described in section
\r
11003 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11009 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
11018 If there are several
\r
11022 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
\r
11023 You can therefore use
\r
11027 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
\r
11030 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11035 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
\r
11036 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11042 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
11049 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11050 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11060 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
\r
11061 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
\r
11073 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11074 Paragraph Alignment
\r
11075 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11079 Paragraph ! Alignment
\r
11087 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11088 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
\r
11090 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11091 Paragraph Settings
\r
11093 dialog (toolbar button
\r
11094 \begin_inset Info
\r
11096 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
11100 There are five possibilities:
\r
11103 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11109 \begin_inset Info
\r
11111 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
\r
11117 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11123 \begin_inset Info
\r
11125 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
\r
11131 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11137 \begin_inset Info
\r
11139 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
\r
11145 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11151 \begin_inset Info
\r
11153 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
\r
11159 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11165 \begin_inset Info
\r
11167 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
\r
11173 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11174 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
\r
11175 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
\r
11176 the left and right margins.
\r
11177 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
\r
11180 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11182 This paragraph is right aligned,
\r
11185 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11187 this one is centered,
\r
11190 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11192 this one is left aligned.
\r
11195 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11196 Forced Page Breaks
\r
11197 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11201 Page breaks ! Forced
\r
11207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11208 LatexCommand label
\r
11209 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
11216 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11217 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
\r
11218 can force a page break where you want one.
\r
11219 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
\r
11220 Only if you use a lot of
\r
11224 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
\r
11227 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11228 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
\r
11229 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
\r
11233 have to change the page breaking.
\r
11236 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11237 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
\r
11239 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
\r
11241 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11242 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11244 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11250 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
\r
11252 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11253 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11255 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11260 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
\r
11261 the complete page.
\r
11262 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
\r
11263 on which only the last few lines are absent.
\r
11266 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11267 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
\r
11268 at the top of a page.
\r
11269 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
\r
11270 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
\r
11271 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
\r
11272 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
\r
11274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11276 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
\r
11280 to learn more about
\r
11287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
11288 Clear Page Breaks
\r
11289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11290 LatexCommand label
\r
11291 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
11296 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11300 Page breaks ! Clear
\r
11308 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11309 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
\r
11310 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
\r
11311 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
\r
11312 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
\r
11313 it, if necessary by adding pages.
\r
11316 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11317 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
\r
11319 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11320 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11322 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11328 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
\r
11330 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11331 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11333 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11337 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11342 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
\r
11343 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
\r
11346 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11347 Forced Line Breaks
\r
11348 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11359 LatexCommand label
\r
11360 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
11367 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11368 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
\r
11370 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
\r
11372 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11373 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11375 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11379 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11385 \begin_inset Info
\r
11387 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
11391 Another type that is inserted via the menu
\r
11393 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11394 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11396 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11400 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11406 \begin_inset Info
\r
11408 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
\r
11411 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
\r
11412 the page margins.
\r
11413 This is useful to avoid
\r
11414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
11418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
11421 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
\r
11424 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11425 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
\r
11426 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
\r
11427 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
\r
11428 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
\r
11429 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11435 reference "sec:Quote"
\r
11440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11442 reference "sec:Verse"
\r
11447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11449 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
\r
11456 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11459 LatexCommand label
\r
11460 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
\r
11465 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11477 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11479 \begin_inset CommandInset line
\r
11480 LatexCommand rule
\r
11490 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11494 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11495 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11497 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11502 you can insert horizontal lines.
\r
11503 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
\r
11504 of the current text line or the paragraph.
\r
11505 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
\r
11508 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11510 \begin_inset CommandInset line
\r
11511 LatexCommand rule
\r
11521 \begin_layout Section
\r
11522 Characters and Symbols
\r
11525 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11526 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
\r
11527 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
\r
11528 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
\r
11530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11536 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
\r
11540 for information on how this is done.
\r
11543 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11544 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
\r
11549 dialog via the menu
\r
11551 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11552 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11558 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11567 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
\r
11568 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
\r
11569 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
\r
11577 \begin_layout Section
\r
11578 Fonts and Text Styles
\r
11579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11580 LatexCommand label
\r
11581 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
\r
11588 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11590 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11602 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11603 There are two types of fonts:
\r
11606 \begin_layout Description
\r
11608 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11612 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11621 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
\r
11622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11626 characters) in the font.
\r
11627 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
\r
11628 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
\r
11629 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
\r
11630 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
\r
11631 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
\r
11632 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
\r
11633 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
\r
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11637 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
\r
11638 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
\r
11639 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
\r
11640 sizes than at small ones.
\r
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11645 \family typewriter
\r
11649 \family typewriter
\r
11653 \family typewriter
\r
11655 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11660 are vector fonts.
\r
11663 \begin_layout Description
\r
11665 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11669 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11678 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
\r
11679 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
\r
11680 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
\r
11681 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
\r
11682 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
\r
11683 image manipulation program.
\r
11684 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
\r
11685 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
\r
11686 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11689 pixels high up to 34
\r
11690 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11693 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
\r
11694 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
\r
11695 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
\r
11697 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
\r
11698 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
\r
11699 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11702 Bitmap fonts are named
\r
11703 \family typewriter
\r
11705 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11710 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
\r
11713 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11714 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
\r
11715 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
\r
11716 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
\r
11717 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
\r
11718 use scalable fonts.
\r
11721 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11722 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
\r
11725 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11726 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
\r
11727 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
\r
11728 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
\r
11729 font to emphasize text, you use an
\r
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
11738 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
\r
11739 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
\r
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11744 LaTeX font support
\r
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11746 LatexCommand label
\r
11747 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
11754 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11755 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
\r
11756 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
\r
11757 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
\r
11759 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
\r
11760 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
\r
11761 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
\r
11762 to a word processor.
\r
11763 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
\r
11764 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
\r
11765 across different machines.
\r
11766 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
\r
11767 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
\r
11769 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
\r
11771 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11777 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
11782 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
\r
11783 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
\r
11787 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11788 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
\r
11789 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
\r
11791 Both engines are supported by LyX.
\r
11792 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
\r
11793 that is installed on your system.
\r
11794 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
\r
11797 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11806 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
\r
11807 es; so you might have to experiment.
\r
11815 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11824 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
\r
11825 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
\r
11833 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11834 Document Font and Font size
\r
11835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11836 LatexCommand label
\r
11837 name "sub:Document-Font"
\r
11842 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11852 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11864 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11865 You can set the document fonts in the
\r
11867 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11871 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11875 Document ! Settings
\r
11885 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
\r
11886 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
\r
11889 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11895 \family typewriter
\r
11898 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
\r
11899 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
\r
11900 with the roman font.
\r
11903 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11919 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
\r
11920 This requires that you use
\r
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11965 as the output format, i.
\r
11966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11970 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
11973 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
\r
11974 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11980 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
11985 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
\r
11986 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
\r
11988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11991 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
\r
11992 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
\r
11993 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
11994 or font failures.
\r
11995 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
\r
11998 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11999 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
\r
12004 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
\r
12009 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
\r
12010 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
\r
12011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12015 \family typewriter
\r
12017 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12027 \family typewriter
\r
12031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12035 \family typewriter
\r
12036 European Computer Modern
\r
12039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12043 \family typewriter
\r
12046 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
\r
12049 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12051 \family typewriter
\r
12055 \family typewriter
\r
12058 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
\r
12059 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
\r
12060 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12064 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
\r
12065 \family typewriter
\r
12067 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12072 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
\r
12078 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
\r
12079 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
\r
12082 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12086 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12091 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
\r
12093 \family typewriter
\r
12097 \family typewriter
\r
12104 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12109 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
\r
12110 \family typewriter
\r
12113 as the default font.
\r
12114 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
\r
12115 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
\r
12118 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12123 looks identical to
\r
12124 \family typewriter
\r
12128 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12132 One difference is improved kerning.
\r
12140 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12144 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12148 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12153 fonts in (the rare) case that
\r
12156 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12161 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
\r
12163 \family typewriter
\r
12167 \family typewriter
\r
12172 \family typewriter
\r
12175 is a virtual font.
\r
12176 Virtual means that it
\r
12177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12185 \family typewriter
\r
12188 -glyphs from other fonts.
\r
12189 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
\r
12191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12207 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12211 Loading the LaTeX-package
\r
12216 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12220 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
\r
12225 with the document preamble line
\r
12226 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12233 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
\r
12234 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12239 will fix the guillemet problem.
\r
12244 and that accented characters are not
\r
12248 glyph, but built of
\r
12252 characters, the accent and the letter.
\r
12253 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
\r
12255 \family typewriter
\r
12259 If you search for example for the French word
\r
12260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12267 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
\r
12269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12276 and not for the glyph
\r
12277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12281 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12291 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12292 If you do not like the look of
\r
12293 \family typewriter
\r
12297 \family typewriter
\r
12300 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
\r
12301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12305 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12309 \family typewriter
\r
12311 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12317 \family typewriter
\r
12321 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
\r
12322 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12325 serif and typewriter fonts,
\r
12326 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12330 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
\r
12331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12337 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12346 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
\r
12347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12351 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
12359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12363 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
12369 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12377 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12387 but you can also select your own.
\r
12388 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12391 The differences between roman,
\r
12394 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12400 \family typewriter
\r
12403 fonts are explained in section
\r
12404 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12410 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12415 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12421 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12426 was originally designed for newspapers.
\r
12427 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
\r
12428 into the small newspaper columns.
\r
12432 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12437 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
\r
12440 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12441 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
\r
12454 Some classes provide additional sizes.
\r
12459 depends on the class you are using.
\r
12460 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
\r
12463 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12464 Note that the font size is the
\r
12469 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
\r
12470 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
\r
12471 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
\r
12474 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12479 dialog if needed.
\r
12480 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
\r
12481 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12487 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12494 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12498 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12503 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
\r
12505 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12508 serif or typewriter.
\r
12513 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
\r
12523 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
\r
12526 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12528 \family typewriter
\r
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12544 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
\r
12545 the LaTeX-package
\r
12550 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12554 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
\r
12560 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12566 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
12571 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
\r
12572 Unless you have specific reasons, use
\r
12579 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12580 With some fonts, the checkboxes
\r
12582 Use Old Style Figures
\r
12586 Use True Small Caps
\r
12589 These are extra features some fonts provide.
\r
12592 Use Old Style Figures
\r
12594 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
\r
12596 Old style figures are the numerals (0
\r
12597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12604 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
\r
12608 Use True Small Caps
\r
12610 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
\r
12611 of scaled capitals.
\r
12612 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
\r
12613 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
\r
12616 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12621 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
\r
12622 a font to display the script characters.
\r
12623 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12627 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
\r
12632 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12636 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
12641 So this has no effect for the document language
\r
12645 that does not use
\r
12655 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
12659 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
12662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12667 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
\r
12671 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
\r
12672 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
\r
12673 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
\r
12675 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12678 dialog, see section
\r
12679 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12685 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
12697 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
12698 Using Different Character Styles
\r
12699 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12709 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12721 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12722 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
\r
12723 certain paragraph environments.
\r
12724 LyX supports two character styles,
\r
12733 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
\r
12737 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12742 style, do one of the following:
\r
12745 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12746 click on the toolbar button
\r
12747 \begin_inset Info
\r
12755 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12756 use the key binding
\r
12757 \begin_inset Info
\r
12765 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12766 These commands are all toggles.
\r
12771 style is already active, they deactivate it.
\r
12774 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12775 One typically uses the
\r
12779 style for proper names.
\r
12781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12788 is the original author of LyX.
\r
12789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12795 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12796 A more widely used character style is the
\r
12801 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
\r
12808 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12809 clicking on the toolbar button
\r
12810 \begin_inset Info
\r
12818 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12819 using the keybindings
\r
12820 \begin_inset Info
\r
12828 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12833 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
\r
12834 es use a different font.
\r
12837 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12838 We've been using the
\r
12842 style all over the place in this document.
\r
12843 Here's one more example:
\r
12846 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
12849 Do not overuse character styles!
\r
12852 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12853 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
\r
12854 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
\r
12855 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
\r
12856 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
\r
12860 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12861 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
\r
12862 \begin_inset Info
\r
12864 arg "font-default"
\r
12869 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12871 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12874 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12878 \begin_inset Info
\r
12880 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
12886 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
12887 Fine-Tuning with the
\r
12892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
12893 LatexCommand label
\r
12894 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12899 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12911 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12912 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
\r
12913 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
\r
12914 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
\r
12915 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
\r
12916 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
\r
12917 from ordinary dialog.
\r
12920 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12921 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
\r
12922 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
\r
12923 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12926 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
\r
12927 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
\r
12930 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12931 To use custom character styles, open the
\r
12933 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12935 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12938 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12941 dialog or press the toolbar button
\r
12942 \begin_inset Info
\r
12944 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
12948 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
\r
12949 font property that you can choose.
\r
12950 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
\r
12953 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12958 , which keeps the current state of that property.
\r
12963 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
\r
12964 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
\r
12965 environments all at once.
\r
12968 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12969 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
\r
12972 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12984 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
12985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
12991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12999 The possible options are:
\r
13003 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13004 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13009 This is the Roman font family.
\r
13010 Normally a serif font.
\r
13011 It's also the default family.
\r
13013 \begin_inset Info
\r
13021 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13026 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13033 This is the Sans Serif font family.
\r
13037 \begin_inset Info
\r
13045 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13052 \family typewriter
\r
13053 This is the Typewriter font family.
\r
13057 \begin_inset Info
\r
13059 arg "font-typewriter"
\r
13068 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13074 This corresponds to the print weight.
\r
13079 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13085 This is the Medium font series.
\r
13086 It's also the default series.
\r
13089 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13090 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13097 This is the Bold font series.
\r
13101 \begin_inset Info
\r
13110 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13116 As the name implies.
\r
13121 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13127 This is the Upright font shape.
\r
13128 It's also the default shape.
\r
13131 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13146 s the Italic font shape
\r
13152 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13160 This is the Slanted font shape
\r
13162 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
\r
13165 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13170 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13177 This is the Small caps font shape
\r
13184 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13190 Alters the text color.
\r
13191 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
\r
13195 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13200 , which means that the document default color set in
\r
13202 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13203 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13209 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13214 is used, you can choose between
\r
13247 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
13250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13259 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13265 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
\r
13266 the language of the document.
\r
13267 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
\r
13268 (only within LyX).
\r
13269 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13272 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
\r
13273 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
\r
13274 When using the spell checking (see section
\r
13275 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
13281 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
13285 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
\r
13288 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13294 Alters the size of the font.
\r
13295 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
\r
13296 proportional to the document font size.
\r
13297 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
\r
13298 what you want to do.
\r
13303 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13323 \begin_inset Info
\r
13325 arg "font-size tiny"
\r
13331 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13351 \begin_inset Info
\r
13353 arg "font-size scriptsize"
\r
13359 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13366 \size footnotesize
\r
13368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13379 \begin_inset Info
\r
13381 arg "font-size footnotesize"
\r
13387 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13407 \begin_inset Info
\r
13409 arg "font-size small"
\r
13415 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13430 It's also the default size.
\r
13432 \begin_inset Info
\r
13434 arg "font-size normal"
\r
13440 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13460 \begin_inset Info
\r
13462 arg "font-size large"
\r
13468 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13488 \begin_inset Info
\r
13490 arg "font-size larger"
\r
13496 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13516 \begin_inset Info
\r
13518 arg "font-size largest"
\r
13524 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13544 \begin_inset Info
\r
13546 arg "font-size huge"
\r
13552 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13572 \begin_inset Info
\r
13574 arg "font-size giant"
\r
13580 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13586 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
\r
13587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13604 \begin_inset Info
\r
13606 arg "font-size increase"
\r
13612 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13618 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
\r
13619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13636 \begin_inset Info
\r
13638 arg "font-size decrease"
\r
13645 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13650 : don't go crazy with this feature.
\r
13651 You should almost never need to change the font size.
\r
13652 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
\r
13653 — use those instead.
\r
13654 This is here for fine-tuning only!
\r
13657 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13663 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
\r
13668 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13676 This is text with emphasize on
\r
13679 This might seem like the same as
\r
13683 , but it is actually a bit different.
\r
13689 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
\r
13691 Normally this font is equal to italic.
\r
13694 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13702 This is text with Underbar on.
\r
13706 \begin_inset Info
\r
13708 arg "font-underline"
\r
13714 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13719 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
\r
13720 when you could not change fonts.
\r
13721 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
\r
13722 This is only possible in LyX because some people
\r
13726 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
\r
13729 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13734 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13741 This is text with Double underbar on.
\r
13745 \begin_inset Info
\r
13747 arg "font-underunderline"
\r
13751 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13754 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
\r
13755 about double underbar.
\r
13758 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13763 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13770 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
\r
13774 \begin_inset Info
\r
13776 arg "font-underwave"
\r
13780 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13783 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
\r
13784 Keep antinausea pills handy.
\r
13787 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13795 This is text with Strikeout on.
\r
13797 \strikeout default
\r
13799 \begin_inset Info
\r
13801 arg "font-strikeout"
\r
13805 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13808 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
\r
13809 changed in the meantime.
\r
13812 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13820 This is text with Noun on.
\r
13827 , this is a logical attribute.
\r
13828 Normally it's equivalent to
\r
13831 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13840 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13841 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
\r
13842 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
\r
13844 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13846 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13849 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13853 \begin_inset Info
\r
13855 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
13858 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
\r
13859 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
\r
13860 \begin_inset Info
\r
13862 arg "textstyle-apply"
\r
13866 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
\r
13870 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13871 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
\r
13872 \begin_inset Info
\r
13874 arg "font-default"
\r
13878 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
\r
13879 (suppose you just set the shape to
\r
13880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13887 and the series to
\r
13888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13898 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13903 switch and press
\r
13910 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13911 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
\r
13919 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13931 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
13937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13944 font, which means every character has the same width; the
\r
13945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13952 is as wide as the
\r
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13961 Here is an example
\r
13962 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13966 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
13969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13976 \family typewriter
\r
13980 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
13983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13984 For more on phantoms see section
\r
13985 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
13991 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
14001 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14004 no typewriter text
\r
14007 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
14012 fonts use characters with serifs.
\r
14013 These are the small
\r
14014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14021 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
\r
14022 The following example shows the difference:
\r
14023 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14027 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14032 text without serifs
\r
14035 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14038 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
\r
14039 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
\r
14046 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
14051 is not recommended for use as a base type.
\r
14052 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
\r
14053 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
\r
14056 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14064 refers to applying or removing font properties.
\r
14065 When a property is marked for toggling in the
\r
14068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14073 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
\r
14074 the property to be removed.
\r
14075 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
\r
14076 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
\r
14077 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
\r
14080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14095 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
\r
14096 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
\r
14097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14104 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
\r
14108 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14113 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
\r
14116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14123 is never toggled.
\r
14124 If you, for example, set
\r
14125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14143 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14148 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
\r
14150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14157 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
\r
14160 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14161 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
\r
14162 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
\r
14165 \begin_layout Section
\r
14166 Printing and Previewing
\r
14169 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
14173 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14174 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
\r
14175 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
\r
14176 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
\r
14177 goes on behind-the-scenes.
\r
14178 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
\r
14180 Additional Features
\r
14185 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14186 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
\r
14187 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
\r
14188 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
\r
14189 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
\r
14190 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
\r
14191 This happens in two stages:
\r
14194 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
14195 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
\r
14196 generating a file with the extension,
\r
14197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14201 \family typewriter
\r
14205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14211 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
14212 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
\r
14213 \family typewriter
\r
14216 file to produce printable output.
\r
14219 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
14220 Output file formats
\r
14221 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
14232 LatexCommand label
\r
14233 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
14240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14241 Simple text (ASCII)
\r
14242 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14246 File formats ! ASCII
\r
14254 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14255 This file type has the extension
\r
14256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14260 \family typewriter
\r
14264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14268 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
\r
14269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14272 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
\r
14273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14279 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14280 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
\r
14282 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14283 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14285 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14291 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
\r
14292 a BibTeX bibliography (section
\r
14293 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14299 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
14304 If your document includes such material, use
\r
14306 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14307 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14309 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14313 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14317 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14325 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14329 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14335 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
\r
14336 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
\r
14339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14341 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14345 File formats ! LaTeX
\r
14353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14354 This file type has the extension
\r
14355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14359 \family typewriter
\r
14363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14366 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
\r
14368 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
\r
14369 it manually with console commands.
\r
14370 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
\r
14371 you view or export your document.
\r
14374 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14375 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
\r
14377 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14378 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14393 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
\r
14394 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14400 reference "sub:Export"
\r
14407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14409 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14413 File formats ! DVI
\r
14421 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14422 This file type has the extension
\r
14423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14427 \family typewriter
\r
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14439 device-independent
\r
14440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14443 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
\r
14444 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
\r
14445 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
\r
14449 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14450 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
\r
14451 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
\r
14452 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
\r
14453 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
\r
14454 when you view the DVI.
\r
14455 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
\r
14458 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14459 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
\r
14461 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14462 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14467 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14468 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14470 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14487 The latter option uses the program
\r
14488 \family typewriter
\r
14493 \family typewriter
\r
14496 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
\r
14497 font access (see section
\r
14498 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14504 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14509 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
\r
14510 standard TeX processor.
\r
14513 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14515 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14519 File formats ! PostScript
\r
14527 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14528 This file type has the extension
\r
14529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14533 \family typewriter
\r
14537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14541 PostScript was developed by the company
\r
14542 \family typewriter
\r
14545 as a printer language.
\r
14546 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
\r
14548 PostScript can be seen as a
\r
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14552 programming language
\r
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14556 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
\r
14557 \begin_inset Foot
\r
14560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14561 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
\r
14567 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14571 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
\r
14581 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
\r
14584 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14585 PostScript can only contain images in the format
\r
14586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14589 Encapsulated PostScript
\r
14590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14593 (EPS, file extension
\r
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14598 \family typewriter
\r
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14606 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
\r
14607 to convert them in the background to EPS.
\r
14608 If, for example, you have 50
\r
14609 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14612 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
\r
14613 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14616 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
\r
14617 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
\r
14618 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
\r
14619 EPS to avoid this problem.
\r
14622 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14623 You can export to PostScript using the menu
\r
14625 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14626 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14632 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14634 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14638 File formats ! PDF
\r
14644 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14656 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14657 This file type has the extension
\r
14658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14662 \family typewriter
\r
14666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14674 Portable Document Format
\r
14675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14678 (PDF) developed by
\r
14679 \family typewriter
\r
14682 was derived from PostScript.
\r
14683 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
\r
14685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14692 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
\r
14693 looks exactly the same.
\r
14696 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14697 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
\r
14698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14701 Joint Photographic Experts Group
\r
14702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14705 (JPG, file extension
\r
14706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14710 \family typewriter
\r
14714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14722 \family typewriter
\r
14726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14733 Portable Network Graphics
\r
14734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14737 (PNG, file extension
\r
14738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14742 \family typewriter
\r
14746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14750 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
\r
14751 background to one of these formats.
\r
14752 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
\r
14753 will slow down your workflow.
\r
14754 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
\r
14757 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14758 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
\r
14760 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14763 in different ways:
\r
14766 \begin_layout Description
\r
14768 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14771 (pdflatex) This uses the program
\r
14772 \family typewriter
\r
14775 which converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14778 \begin_layout Description
\r
14780 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14794 X) This uses the program
\r
14795 \family typewriter
\r
14798 which converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14800 \family typewriter
\r
14803 is a new engine, derived from
\r
14804 \family typewriter
\r
14807 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
\r
14808 access (see section
\r
14809 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14815 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14820 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
\r
14821 standard TeX processor.
\r
14824 \begin_layout Description
\r
14826 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14840 X) This uses the program
\r
14841 \family typewriter
\r
14844 that converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14846 \family typewriter
\r
14849 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
\r
14850 font access (see section
\r
14851 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14857 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14862 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
\r
14863 vertically written Japanese.
\r
14866 \begin_layout Description
\r
14868 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14871 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
\r
14872 \family typewriter
\r
14875 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
\r
14879 \begin_layout Description
\r
14881 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14884 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
\r
14885 \family typewriter
\r
14888 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
\r
14889 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
\r
14890 \family typewriter
\r
14893 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
\r
14894 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
\r
14897 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14898 We recommend using
\r
14901 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14907 \family typewriter
\r
14910 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
\r
14911 works without problems.
\r
14912 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
14913 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
\r
14917 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14936 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14952 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
\r
14954 \family typewriter
\r
14960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14962 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14966 FileFormats ! XHTML
\r
14972 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14984 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14985 This file type has the extension
\r
14986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14990 \family typewriter
\r
14994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14998 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
\r
14999 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
\r
15000 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
\r
15001 suitable for the purpose.
\r
15002 For the math output you can choose in the menu
\r
15004 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15005 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15008 between different formats, which are described in section
\r
15010 Math Output in XHTML
\r
15015 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15023 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15024 XHTML output remains
\r
15025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15028 under development
\r
15029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15032 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
\r
15035 LyX and the World Wide Web
\r
15039 Additional Features
\r
15041 manual, for more information.
\r
15044 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15045 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
\r
15047 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15048 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15054 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15056 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15060 Document ! Preview
\r
15068 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15069 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
\r
15070 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
\r
15079 or use the toolbar button
\r
15080 \begin_inset Info
\r
15082 arg "buffer-view"
\r
15086 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
\r
15087 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
\r
15088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15094 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
15098 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
\r
15100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15106 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
15111 Further output formats can be selected via
\r
15113 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15114 View (Other Formats)
\r
15116 or the toolbar button
\r
15117 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
15118 filename ../images/view-others.png
\r
15120 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
15127 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15128 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
\r
15129 viewer window using the menu
\r
15131 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15136 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15137 Update (Other Formats)
\r
15142 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15143 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
\r
15145 To have a real output, export your document.
\r
15148 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15149 Printing the File from within LyX
\r
15150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15151 LatexCommand label
\r
15152 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
\r
15159 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15160 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
\r
15161 it directly from within LyX.
\r
15162 To print a file, select the menu
\r
15164 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15168 \begin_inset Info
\r
15170 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
15173 ) or click on the toolbar button
\r
15174 \begin_inset Info
\r
15176 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
15180 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
\r
15181 This file is then processed by the program
\r
15182 \family typewriter
\r
15185 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
\r
15186 \family typewriter
\r
15190 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
\r
15193 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15194 You can set the following print parameters in the
\r
15197 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15205 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
15206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
15211 This is the name of the printer to print to.
\r
15212 \begin_inset Foot
\r
15215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15216 Note that this printer name is for the program
\r
15217 \family typewriter
\r
15222 \family typewriter
\r
15225 has to be configured for this printer name.
\r
15226 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
\r
15227 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15233 reference "sub:Printer"
\r
15242 The printer should understand PostScript.
\r
15245 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
15246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
15251 The name of a file to print to.
\r
15252 The output will be a PostScript file.
\r
15253 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
\r
15257 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15258 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
\r
15259 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
\r
15260 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
\r
15261 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
\r
15262 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
\r
15263 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
\r
15264 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
\r
15267 \begin_layout Section
\r
15268 A few Words about Typography
\r
15269 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15281 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15282 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
\r
15283 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15293 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15305 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15311 \family typewriter
\r
15315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15318 character comes in four lengths: the
\r
15330 , and the minus sign:
\r
15331 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
15337 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15338 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
15339 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
\r
15340 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
15341 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
15342 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
15343 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
15344 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15346 \begin_inset Text
\r
15348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15355 \begin_inset Text
\r
15357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15364 \begin_inset Text
\r
15366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15375 \begin_inset Text
\r
15377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15384 \begin_inset Text
\r
15386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15393 \begin_inset Text
\r
15395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15400 \family typewriter
\r
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15413 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15415 \begin_inset Text
\r
15417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15424 \begin_inset Text
\r
15426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15433 \begin_inset Text
\r
15435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15438 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15440 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15443 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15450 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15452 \begin_inset Text
\r
15454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15461 \begin_inset Text
\r
15463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15470 \begin_inset Text
\r
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15477 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15480 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15489 \begin_inset Text
\r
15491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15498 \begin_inset Text
\r
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15501 \begin_inset Formula $-$
\r
15509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15510 \begin_inset Text
\r
15512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15517 \family typewriter
\r
15521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15535 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
15541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15542 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
\r
15543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15547 \family typewriter
\r
15551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15554 character multiple times in a row.
\r
15555 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
\r
15556 the final output, but not in LyX.
\r
15558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15569 gives a en dash,
\r
15570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15588 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15589 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
\r
15590 math mode and has a length of its own.
\r
15591 Here are some examples:
\r
15594 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15595 line- and page-breaks
\r
15596 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15606 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15618 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15619 Oh — there's a dash.
\r
15620 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15630 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15631 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
\r
15635 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15645 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15647 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15658 LatexCommand label
\r
15659 name "sub:Hyphenation"
\r
15666 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15667 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
\r
15668 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
\r
15673 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15677 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
15682 following the rules of the document language.
\r
15685 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15686 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
\r
15691 font and with unusual constructs, like
\r
15692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15700 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
\r
15702 This is done with the menu
\r
15704 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15705 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15707 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15713 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
\r
15714 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
\r
15717 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15718 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
\r
15719 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
\r
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15729 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
\r
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15737 as a hyphenation possibility.
\r
15738 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
\r
15739 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
\r
15740 as described in section
\r
15741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15744 Prevent Hyphenation
\r
15745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15751 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15759 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15760 Punctuation Marks
\r
15761 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15765 Punctuation marks
\r
15773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
15774 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
\r
15775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15776 LatexCommand label
\r
15777 name "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
15784 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15785 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
\r
15786 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
\r
15787 LaTeX then adds the
\r
15788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15791 appropriate amount of space.
\r
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15795 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
\r
15797 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
\r
15798 gets after another word.
\r
15801 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15802 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
\r
15803 not work in all cases.
\r
15805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15809 \family typewriter
\r
15813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15816 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
\r
15817 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
\r
15820 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15821 Here are some examples of
\r
15825 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
\r
15828 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15833 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15838 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15839 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
\r
15842 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15848 this is too much space!
\r
15851 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15856 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15857 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
\r
15860 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15861 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
\r
15864 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15868 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15873 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
\r
15874 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15880 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
15885 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15889 Spaces ! inter-word
\r
15897 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15901 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15906 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
\r
15907 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15913 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
15918 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15930 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15934 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15938 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15942 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15949 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15951 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15956 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
\r
15957 This function is also bound to
\r
15958 \begin_inset Info
\r
15960 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
\r
15966 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15967 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
\r
15970 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15976 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
15979 this is too much space!
\r
15982 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15983 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
\r
15987 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15988 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
\r
15989 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
\r
15990 will take care of this.
\r
15993 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15994 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
\r
15998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16003 feature described in the section
\r
16009 Additional Features
\r
16014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
16016 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16020 Typography ! Quotes
\r
16026 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16060 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16061 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
\r
16062 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
\r
16063 and use a closing quote at the end.
\r
16065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16073 The keyboard character,
\r
16077 , generates this automatically.
\r
16080 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16081 You can specify what character the
\r
16085 key produces using the submenu
\r
16091 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16095 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16099 Document ! Settings
\r
16104 dialog in the box
\r
16109 There are six choices:
\r
16112 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16136 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16140 \begin_inset Quotes sld
\r
16144 \begin_inset Quotes srd
\r
16150 \begin_inset Quotes sld
\r
16154 \begin_inset Quotes srd
\r
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16164 \begin_inset Quotes gld
\r
16168 \begin_inset Quotes grd
\r
16174 \begin_inset Quotes gld
\r
16178 \begin_inset Quotes grd
\r
16184 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16188 \begin_inset Quotes pld
\r
16192 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
16198 \begin_inset Quotes pld
\r
16202 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
16208 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16212 \begin_inset Quotes fld
\r
16216 \begin_inset Quotes frd
\r
16222 \begin_inset Quotes fld
\r
16226 \begin_inset Quotes frd
\r
16232 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16233 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16236 \begin_inset Quotes ald
\r
16240 \begin_inset Quotes ard
\r
16246 \begin_inset Quotes ald
\r
16250 \begin_inset Quotes ard
\r
16256 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16257 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
\r
16258 \begin_inset Info
\r
16260 arg "quote-insert single"
\r
16266 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16268 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16272 Typography ! Ligatures
\r
16278 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16311 LatexCommand label
\r
16312 name "sub:Ligatures"
\r
16319 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16320 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
\r
16321 print them as single characters.
\r
16322 These groups are known as
\r
16327 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
\r
16329 Here are the standard ligatures:
\r
16332 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16336 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16340 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16344 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16348 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16352 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16353 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
\r
16356 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16357 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
\r
16358 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
\r
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16366 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
\r
16367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16382 To break a ligature, use
\r
16384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16387 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16405 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
\r
16407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16422 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
\r
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16430 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16431 LyX's Proper Names
\r
16432 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16436 LyX ! Proper names
\r
16442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16443 LatexCommand label
\r
16444 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
\r
16451 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16452 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
\r
16453 characters in different sizes and heights.
\r
16454 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
\r
16455 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
\r
16456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16475 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
16478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16479 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
\r
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16487 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
\r
16488 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
\r
16493 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
\r
16494 following proper names:
\r
16497 \begin_layout Description
\r
16498 LyX The name of the game, write
\r
16499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16520 \begin_layout Description
\r
16521 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
\r
16522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16543 \begin_layout Description
\r
16544 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
\r
16545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16566 \begin_layout Description
\r
16567 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
\r
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16589 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16590 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
\r
16591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16595 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
\r
16599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16603 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
\r
16604 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
\r
16605 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
\r
16608 : The actual version is
\r
16609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16616 , the previous one was
\r
16617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16627 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16628 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
\r
16629 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
\r
16630 In LyX this will look like
\r
16631 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
16632 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
\r
16638 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16641 For more about TeX Code, see section
\r
16642 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
16648 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
16655 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16657 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16661 Typography ! Units
\r
16669 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16670 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
\r
16671 space between two words.
\r
16672 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
\r
16675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16682 for units use the menu
\r
16684 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16685 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16693 \begin_inset Info
\r
16695 arg "space-insert thin"
\r
16701 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16702 Here is an example to show the differences:
\r
16705 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16706 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
16707 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
16708 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
16709 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
16710 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
16712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16713 \begin_inset Text
\r
16715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16717 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16721 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
\r
16729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16730 \begin_inset Text
\r
16732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16733 space between number and unit
\r
16740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16741 \begin_inset Text
\r
16743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
16749 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
\r
16757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16758 \begin_inset Text
\r
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16761 half space between number and unit
\r
16774 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16775 Widows and Orphans
\r
16776 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16780 Typography ! Widows and orphans
\r
16788 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16789 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
\r
16791 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
\r
16792 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
\r
16793 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
\r
16794 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
\r
16795 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
\r
16796 These bits of text became known as
\r
16807 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16808 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
\r
16809 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
\r
16810 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
\r
16811 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
\r
16812 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
\r
16813 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
\r
16814 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
\r
16817 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16818 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
\r
16819 tweak that behavior.
\r
16820 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
\r
16821 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16825 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
16826 LatexCommand cite
\r
16827 key "latexcompanion"
\r
16832 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
16837 LatexCommand cite
\r
16842 ) may have more information.
\r
16843 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
\r
16846 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
16847 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
\r
16848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16849 LatexCommand label
\r
16850 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
\r
16857 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16858 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
\r
16861 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16867 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
\r
16870 \begin_layout Section
\r
16872 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16883 LatexCommand label
\r
16891 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16892 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
\r
16895 \begin_layout Description
\r
16897 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16900 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
\r
16901 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16905 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
16908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16909 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
\r
16917 \begin_layout Description
\r
16918 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
\r
16919 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
\r
16921 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16922 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16935 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16941 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16945 \begin_inset Note Comment
\r
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16949 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
\r
16957 \begin_layout Description
\r
16959 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16962 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
\r
16963 set in the document settings under
\r
16965 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16967 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16973 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16977 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16981 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
16984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16986 \begin_inset Foot
\r
16989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16990 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
\r
16991 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
\r
16996 of a comment that appears in the output.
\r
17002 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17006 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17009 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
\r
17012 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17013 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
\r
17014 \begin_inset Info
\r
17016 arg "note-insert"
\r
17021 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17025 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
\r
17028 \begin_layout Section
\r
17030 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17041 LatexCommand label
\r
17042 name "sec:Footnotes"
\r
17049 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17050 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
\r
17053 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17056 or the toolbar button
\r
17057 \begin_inset Info
\r
17059 arg "footnote-insert"
\r
17070 a box like this:
\r
17071 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
17072 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
\r
17081 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
\r
17091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17110 label, the box will
\r
17114 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
\r
17115 Clicking on the box label again will close
\r
17128 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
\r
17129 and click on the footnote
\r
17144 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17145 Here is an example footnote:
\r
17150 \begin_inset Foot
\r
17153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17154 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
\r
17162 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17163 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
\r
17164 position where the footnote box is placed.
\r
17165 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
\r
17166 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
\r
17167 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
\r
17168 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
\r
17173 ey are described in the
\r
17176 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17184 \begin_layout Section
\r
17186 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17197 LatexCommand label
\r
17198 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
\r
17205 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17206 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
\r
17207 When you insert a margin note via the menu
\r
17209 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17211 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17216 or the toolbar button
\r
17217 \begin_inset Info
\r
17219 arg "marginalnote-insert"
\r
17238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17245 appearing within your text.
\r
17246 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
\r
17255 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17256 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
\r
17260 \begin_inset Marginal
\r
17263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17265 This is a marginal note.
\r
17273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17274 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
\r
17275 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
\r
17276 pages, right on odd pages.
\r
17279 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17280 For further information about marginal notes see the section
\r
17283 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17299 \begin_layout Section
\r
17300 Graphics and Images
\r
17301 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17311 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17322 LatexCommand label
\r
17323 name "sec:Graphics"
\r
17330 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17331 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
\r
17332 you want and click on the toolbar icon
\r
17333 \begin_inset Info
\r
17335 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
17340 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17344 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
\r
17347 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17348 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
\r
17353 tab allows you to choose your image file.
\r
17354 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
\r
17356 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
\r
17357 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17363 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
17370 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17375 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
\r
17376 of the image in the output.
\r
17377 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
\r
17381 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17385 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17394 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17398 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17402 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17407 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
\r
17408 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
\r
17416 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17431 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17435 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17451 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
\r
17452 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
\r
17456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17461 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
\r
17462 with the image size is printed.
\r
17466 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17470 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17474 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17479 is explained in the
\r
17482 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17487 manual in section
\r
17494 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17495 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
\r
17496 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
\r
17498 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
\r
17501 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17503 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
17504 filename clipart/mobius.eps
\r
17512 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17513 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
\r
17514 the image into a float, see section
\r
17515 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17521 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
\r
17528 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
17530 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17541 LatexCommand label
\r
17542 name "sub:Image-Formats"
\r
17549 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17550 You can insert images in any known file format.
\r
17551 But as we explained in section
\r
17552 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17558 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
17562 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
\r
17563 LyX therefore uses the program
\r
17564 \family typewriter
\r
17567 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
\r
17568 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
\r
17569 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
\r
17570 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17576 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
17583 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17584 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
\r
17587 \begin_layout Description
\r
17589 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17592 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
\r
17593 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
\r
17594 Well-known bitmap image formats are
\r
17595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17598 Graphics Interchange Format
\r
17599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17602 (GIF, file extension
\r
17603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17607 \family typewriter
\r
17611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17615 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17650 Portable Network Graphics
\r
17651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17654 (PNG, file extension
\r
17655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17659 \family typewriter
\r
17663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17667 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17702 Joint Photographic Experts Group
\r
17703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17706 (JPG, file extension
\r
17707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17711 \family typewriter
\r
17715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17723 \family typewriter
\r
17727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17731 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17765 \begin_layout Description
\r
17767 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17770 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
\r
17772 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
\r
17773 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
\r
17774 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
\r
17775 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17778 Scalable image formats can be
\r
17779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17782 Scalable Vector Graphics
\r
17783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17786 (SVG, file extension
\r
17787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17791 \family typewriter
\r
17795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17799 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17834 Encapsulated PostScript
\r
17835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17838 (EPS, file extension
\r
17839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17843 \family typewriter
\r
17847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17851 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17886 Portable Document Format
\r
17887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17890 (PDF, file extension
\r
17891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17895 \family typewriter
\r
17899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17903 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17921 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
\r
17922 result will not be scalable.
\r
17923 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
\r
17925 \begin_inset Foot
\r
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17929 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
\r
17937 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17938 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
\r
17945 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
17946 Grouping of Image Settings
\r
17947 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17951 Images ! Settings grouping
\r
17959 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17960 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
\r
17962 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
\r
17963 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
\r
17965 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
\r
17966 need to manually change each of them.
\r
17970 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17971 A new group can be set by pressing the button
\r
17974 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17978 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18001 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18022 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
\r
18023 and checking the name of the desired group.
\r
18026 \begin_layout Section
\r
18028 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
18039 LatexCommand label
\r
18040 name "sec:Tables"
\r
18047 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18048 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
\r
18049 \begin_inset Info
\r
18051 arg "tabular-insert"
\r
18056 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18060 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
\r
18061 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
\r
18062 from the rest of the table.
\r
18063 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
\r
18064 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
\r
18066 Here is an example table:
\r
18069 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18071 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
\r
18073 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
18074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
\r
18077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18080 \begin_inset Text
\r
18082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18089 \begin_inset Text
\r
18091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18107 \begin_inset Text
\r
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18116 \begin_inset Text
\r
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18127 \begin_inset Text
\r
18129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18145 \begin_inset Text
\r
18147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18154 \begin_inset Text
\r
18156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18163 \begin_inset Text
\r
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18174 \begin_inset Text
\r
18176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18192 \begin_inset Text
\r
18194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18201 \begin_inset Text
\r
18203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18214 \begin_inset Text
\r
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18225 \begin_inset Text
\r
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18243 \begin_inset Text
\r
18245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18252 \begin_inset Text
\r
18254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18261 \begin_inset Text
\r
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18277 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
18281 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18282 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
\r
18285 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18289 This brings up the table dialog.
\r
18290 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
\r
18291 cursor is placed currently.
\r
18292 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
\r
18293 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
\r
18294 done on all of your selection.
\r
18297 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18298 In addition to the table dialog, the
\r
18301 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18306 helps you in setting table properties.
\r
18307 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
\r
18310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18314 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18319 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
\r
18320 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
\r
18321 current cell respectively.
\r
18322 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
\r
18324 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
\r
18325 of text, see section
\r
18326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
18332 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
\r
18339 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18340 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
\r
18341 using the check box
\r
18350 This will merge the cells to
\r
18354 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
\r
18355 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
\r
18356 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
\r
18357 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
\r
18358 in the last row without the upper border:
\r
18361 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18363 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18364 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
\r
18365 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
18366 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18367 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
\r
18368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
\r
18369 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18372 \begin_inset Text
\r
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18380 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18381 \begin_inset Text
\r
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18389 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18390 \begin_inset Text
\r
18392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18399 \begin_inset Text
\r
18401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18410 \begin_inset Text
\r
18412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18428 \begin_inset Text
\r
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18437 \begin_inset Text
\r
18439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18446 \begin_inset Text
\r
18448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18457 \begin_inset Text
\r
18459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18465 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18466 \begin_inset Text
\r
18468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18475 \begin_inset Text
\r
18477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18484 \begin_inset Text
\r
18486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18500 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18501 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
\r
18502 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
\r
18503 explained in the chapter
\r
18510 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18516 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
\r
18517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
18520 degrees counterclockwise.
\r
18521 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
\r
18524 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
18528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18533 Most DVI-viewers are
\r
18537 able to display rotations.
\r
18545 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18550 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
\r
18555 adds lines for all cell borders.
\r
18558 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
18560 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18564 Tables ! Longtables
\r
18570 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18582 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18583 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
\r
18586 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18590 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18599 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
\r
18600 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
\r
18603 \begin_layout Description
\r
18608 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
\r
18609 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
\r
18610 except for the first page, if
\r
18613 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18621 \begin_layout Description
\r
18625 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18630 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
\r
18631 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
\r
18634 \begin_layout Description
\r
18639 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
\r
18640 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
\r
18641 except for the last page, if
\r
18644 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18652 \begin_layout Description
\r
18656 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18661 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
\r
18662 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
\r
18665 \begin_layout Description
\r
18666 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
\r
18667 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
\r
18669 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18673 More about longtable captions can be found in the
\r
18676 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18684 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18685 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
\r
18686 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
\r
18687 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
\r
18693 In this context, first means first in this order:
\r
18696 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18708 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18713 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
\r
18716 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18718 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18719 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
\r
18720 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
18721 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
\r
18722 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18723 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18724 <row endfirsthead="true">
\r
18725 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18726 \begin_inset Text
\r
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18731 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
\r
18736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18737 \begin_inset Text
\r
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18746 \begin_inset Text
\r
18748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18755 <row endfirsthead="true">
\r
18756 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18757 \begin_inset Text
\r
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18767 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18768 \begin_inset Text
\r
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18776 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18777 \begin_inset Text
\r
18779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18788 <row endhead="true">
\r
18789 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18790 \begin_inset Text
\r
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18795 Example Phone List
\r
18800 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18801 \begin_inset Text
\r
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18809 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18810 \begin_inset Text
\r
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18819 <row endhead="true">
\r
18820 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18821 \begin_inset Text
\r
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18831 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18832 \begin_inset Text
\r
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18840 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18841 \begin_inset Text
\r
18843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18852 <row endfoot="true">
\r
18853 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18854 \begin_inset Text
\r
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18864 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18865 \begin_inset Text
\r
18867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18873 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18874 \begin_inset Text
\r
18876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18885 \begin_inset Text
\r
18887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18896 \begin_inset Text
\r
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18904 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18905 \begin_inset Text
\r
18907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18916 \begin_inset Text
\r
18918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18927 \begin_inset Text
\r
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18936 \begin_inset Text
\r
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18947 \begin_inset Text
\r
18949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18958 \begin_inset Text
\r
18960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18967 \begin_inset Text
\r
18969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18978 \begin_inset Text
\r
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18989 \begin_inset Text
\r
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18998 \begin_inset Text
\r
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19009 \begin_inset Text
\r
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19020 \begin_inset Text
\r
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19029 \begin_inset Text
\r
19031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19040 \begin_inset Text
\r
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19051 \begin_inset Text
\r
19053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19060 \begin_inset Text
\r
19062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19071 \begin_inset Text
\r
19073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19082 \begin_inset Text
\r
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19091 \begin_inset Text
\r
19093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19102 \begin_inset Text
\r
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19113 \begin_inset Text
\r
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19122 \begin_inset Text
\r
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19133 \begin_inset Text
\r
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19144 \begin_inset Text
\r
19146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19153 \begin_inset Text
\r
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19164 \begin_inset Text
\r
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19175 \begin_inset Text
\r
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19184 \begin_inset Text
\r
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19195 \begin_inset Text
\r
19197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19206 \begin_inset Text
\r
19208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19215 \begin_inset Text
\r
19217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19226 \begin_inset Text
\r
19228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19237 \begin_inset Text
\r
19239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19246 \begin_inset Text
\r
19248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19257 \begin_inset Text
\r
19259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19268 \begin_inset Text
\r
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19277 \begin_inset Text
\r
19279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19288 \begin_inset Text
\r
19290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19299 \begin_inset Text
\r
19301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19308 \begin_inset Text
\r
19310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19319 \begin_inset Text
\r
19321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19330 \begin_inset Text
\r
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19339 \begin_inset Text
\r
19341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19350 \begin_inset Text
\r
19352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19361 \begin_inset Text
\r
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19370 \begin_inset Text
\r
19372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19381 \begin_inset Text
\r
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19392 \begin_inset Text
\r
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19401 \begin_inset Text
\r
19403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19412 \begin_inset Text
\r
19414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19423 \begin_inset Text
\r
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19432 \begin_inset Text
\r
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19443 \begin_inset Text
\r
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19454 \begin_inset Text
\r
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19463 \begin_inset Text
\r
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19474 \begin_inset Text
\r
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19485 \begin_inset Text
\r
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19494 \begin_inset Text
\r
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19505 \begin_inset Text
\r
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19516 \begin_inset Text
\r
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19525 \begin_inset Text
\r
19527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19536 \begin_inset Text
\r
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19547 \begin_inset Text
\r
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19556 \begin_inset Text
\r
19558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19567 \begin_inset Text
\r
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19578 \begin_inset Text
\r
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19587 \begin_inset Text
\r
19589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19598 \begin_inset Text
\r
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19609 \begin_inset Text
\r
19611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19618 \begin_inset Text
\r
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19629 \begin_inset Text
\r
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19640 \begin_inset Text
\r
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19649 \begin_inset Text
\r
19651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19660 \begin_inset Text
\r
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19671 \begin_inset Text
\r
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19680 \begin_inset Text
\r
19682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19691 \begin_inset Text
\r
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19702 \begin_inset Text
\r
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19711 \begin_inset Text
\r
19713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19722 \begin_inset Text
\r
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19733 \begin_inset Text
\r
19735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19742 \begin_inset Text
\r
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19753 \begin_inset Text
\r
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19764 \begin_inset Text
\r
19766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19773 \begin_inset Text
\r
19775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19784 \begin_inset Text
\r
19786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19795 \begin_inset Text
\r
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19804 \begin_inset Text
\r
19806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19815 \begin_inset Text
\r
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19826 \begin_inset Text
\r
19828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19835 \begin_inset Text
\r
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19845 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19846 \begin_inset Text
\r
19848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19854 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19855 \begin_inset Text
\r
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19863 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19864 \begin_inset Text
\r
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19875 \begin_inset Text
\r
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19886 \begin_inset Text
\r
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19895 \begin_inset Text
\r
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19906 \begin_inset Text
\r
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19917 \begin_inset Text
\r
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19926 \begin_inset Text
\r
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19936 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19937 \begin_inset Text
\r
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19948 \begin_inset Text
\r
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19957 \begin_inset Text
\r
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19968 \begin_inset Text
\r
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19979 \begin_inset Text
\r
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19988 \begin_inset Text
\r
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19999 \begin_inset Text
\r
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20010 \begin_inset Text
\r
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20019 \begin_inset Text
\r
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20030 \begin_inset Text
\r
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20041 \begin_inset Text
\r
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20050 \begin_inset Text
\r
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20061 \begin_inset Text
\r
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20072 \begin_inset Text
\r
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20081 \begin_inset Text
\r
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20092 \begin_inset Text
\r
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20103 \begin_inset Text
\r
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20112 \begin_inset Text
\r
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20123 \begin_inset Text
\r
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20134 \begin_inset Text
\r
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20143 \begin_inset Text
\r
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20154 \begin_inset Text
\r
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20165 \begin_inset Text
\r
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20174 \begin_inset Text
\r
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20185 \begin_inset Text
\r
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20196 \begin_inset Text
\r
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20205 \begin_inset Text
\r
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20216 \begin_inset Text
\r
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20227 \begin_inset Text
\r
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20236 \begin_inset Text
\r
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20247 \begin_inset Text
\r
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20258 \begin_inset Text
\r
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20267 \begin_inset Text
\r
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20278 \begin_inset Text
\r
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20289 \begin_inset Text
\r
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20298 \begin_inset Text
\r
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20309 \begin_inset Text
\r
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20320 \begin_inset Text
\r
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20329 \begin_inset Text
\r
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20340 \begin_inset Text
\r
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20351 \begin_inset Text
\r
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20360 \begin_inset Text
\r
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20371 \begin_inset Text
\r
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20382 \begin_inset Text
\r
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20391 \begin_inset Text
\r
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20402 \begin_inset Text
\r
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20413 \begin_inset Text
\r
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20422 \begin_inset Text
\r
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20433 \begin_inset Text
\r
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20444 \begin_inset Text
\r
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20453 \begin_inset Text
\r
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20464 \begin_inset Text
\r
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20475 \begin_inset Text
\r
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20484 \begin_inset Text
\r
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20495 \begin_inset Text
\r
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20506 \begin_inset Text
\r
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20515 \begin_inset Text
\r
20517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20526 \begin_inset Text
\r
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20537 \begin_inset Text
\r
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20546 \begin_inset Text
\r
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20557 \begin_inset Text
\r
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20568 \begin_inset Text
\r
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20577 \begin_inset Text
\r
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20588 \begin_inset Text
\r
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20599 \begin_inset Text
\r
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20608 \begin_inset Text
\r
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20619 \begin_inset Text
\r
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20630 \begin_inset Text
\r
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20639 \begin_inset Text
\r
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20650 \begin_inset Text
\r
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20661 \begin_inset Text
\r
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20670 \begin_inset Text
\r
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20680 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20681 \begin_inset Text
\r
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20692 \begin_inset Text
\r
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20701 \begin_inset Text
\r
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20712 \begin_inset Text
\r
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20723 \begin_inset Text
\r
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20732 \begin_inset Text
\r
20734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20743 \begin_inset Text
\r
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20754 \begin_inset Text
\r
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20763 \begin_inset Text
\r
20765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20774 \begin_inset Text
\r
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20785 \begin_inset Text
\r
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20794 \begin_inset Text
\r
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20805 \begin_inset Text
\r
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20816 \begin_inset Text
\r
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20825 \begin_inset Text
\r
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20834 <row endlastfoot="true">
\r
20835 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20836 \begin_inset Text
\r
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20846 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20847 \begin_inset Text
\r
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20855 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20856 \begin_inset Text
\r
20858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20872 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
20874 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
20885 LatexCommand label
\r
20886 name "sub:Table-Cells"
\r
20893 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20894 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
\r
20895 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
\r
20896 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
\r
20897 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
\r
20901 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
\r
20904 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20905 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
\r
20906 for the column in the table dialog.
\r
20907 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
\r
20908 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
\r
20912 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20914 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
20915 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
\r
20916 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
20917 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
20918 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
\r
20919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20922 \begin_inset Text
\r
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20939 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20940 \begin_inset Text
\r
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20958 \begin_inset Text
\r
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20978 \begin_inset Text
\r
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20996 \begin_inset Text
\r
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21008 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
\r
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21014 \begin_inset Text
\r
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21034 \begin_inset Text
\r
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21052 \begin_inset Text
\r
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21064 This is longer now.
\r
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21070 \begin_inset Text
\r
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21090 \begin_inset Text
\r
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21108 \begin_inset Text
\r
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21120 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
\r
21121 This is longer now.
\r
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21127 \begin_inset Text
\r
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21152 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21153 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
\r
21154 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
\r
21155 \begin_inset Foot
\r
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21159 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
\r
21160 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
\r
21166 Selection with the mouse or with
\r
21170 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
\r
21171 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
\r
21172 the selection from outside the table.
\r
21175 \begin_layout Section
\r
21177 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21188 LatexCommand label
\r
21189 name "sec:Floats"
\r
21196 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21200 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21201 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
\r
21202 have a fixed location.
\r
21204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21211 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
\r
21219 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21224 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
\r
21225 too many notes on the current page.
\r
21228 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21229 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
\r
21230 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
\r
21231 and pages without text.
\r
21232 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
\r
21233 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
\r
21234 Floats are therefore numbered.
\r
21235 Referencing is described in section
\r
21236 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21242 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
21249 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21250 To insert a float, use the menu
\r
21252 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21256 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
\r
21257 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
\r
21259 After the label you can insert the caption text.
\r
21260 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21264 Floats ! Captions
\r
21269 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
\r
21270 paragraph within the float.
\r
21271 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
\r
21272 by left-clicking on the box label.
\r
21273 A closed float box looks like this:
\r
21274 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21275 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
\r
21280 – a gray button with a red label.
\r
21283 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21284 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
\r
21285 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
\r
21288 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
21294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21295 LatexCommand label
\r
21296 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
\r
21301 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21305 Floats ! Figure floats
\r
21313 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21315 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21321 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
\r
21325 was created using the menu
\r
21327 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21328 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21332 \begin_inset Info
\r
21334 arg "float-insert figure"
\r
21338 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
\r
21341 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21345 \begin_inset Info
\r
21347 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
21351 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
\r
21352 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
\r
21354 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21356 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21362 \begin_inset Info
\r
21364 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
21370 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21371 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21378 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21379 filename clipart/platypus.eps
\r
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21389 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21393 LatexCommand label
\r
21394 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
\r
21398 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
\r
21411 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21412 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
\r
21413 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
\r
21415 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21419 \begin_inset Info
\r
21421 arg "label-insert"
\r
21424 ) and refer to it using the menu
\r
21426 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21430 \begin_inset Info
\r
21432 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
21436 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
\r
21437 vague references like
\r
21438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21445 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
\r
21447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21455 For more about cross-references, see section
\r
21456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21462 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
21469 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21470 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
\r
21471 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
\r
21472 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
\r
21473 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
\r
21474 as described in section
\r
21475 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21481 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
\r
21487 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21493 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
21497 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
\r
21498 You can also set the images one below the other.
\r
21500 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21506 reference "fig:Undefinable"
\r
21511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21513 reference "fig:Platypus"
\r
21517 are the subfigures.
\r
21520 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21521 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21531 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21537 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21541 LatexCommand label
\r
21542 name "fig:Undefinable"
\r
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21555 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21556 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
\r
21567 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21571 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21577 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21581 LatexCommand label
\r
21582 name "fig:Platypus"
\r
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21595 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21596 filename clipart/platypus.eps
\r
21608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21615 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21619 LatexCommand label
\r
21620 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
21624 Two distorted images.
\r
21637 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
21639 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21643 Floats ! Table floats
\r
21651 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21652 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
\r
21654 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21655 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21658 or the toolbar button
\r
21659 \begin_inset Info
\r
21661 arg "float-insert table"
\r
21665 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
\r
21666 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
\r
21667 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
\r
21669 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21675 reference "tab:Table-float"
\r
21679 is a table float.
\r
21682 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21683 \begin_inset Float table
\r
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21689 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21693 LatexCommand label
\r
21694 name "tab:Table-float"
\r
21706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21708 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
21709 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
\r
21710 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
21711 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21712 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21713 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21716 \begin_inset Text
\r
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21734 \begin_inset Text
\r
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21752 \begin_inset Text
\r
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21772 \begin_inset Text
\r
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21790 \begin_inset Text
\r
21792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21808 \begin_inset Text
\r
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21828 \begin_inset Text
\r
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21840 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
\r
21848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21849 \begin_inset Text
\r
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21861 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
21864 \end{array}\right]$
\r
21872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21873 \begin_inset Text
\r
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21885 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
\r
21906 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21908 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21920 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21921 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
\r
21922 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
\r
21923 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
\r
21925 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
\r
21933 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21941 \begin_layout Section
\r
21943 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21955 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21956 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
\r
21957 called a minipage.
\r
21958 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
\r
21959 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
21966 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21967 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
\r
21969 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21973 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
\r
21974 and its alignment within the page.
\r
21977 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21979 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
21989 height_special "totalheight"
\r
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21995 This is a minipage.
\r
21996 The text is set in an italic style.
\r
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22002 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
\r
22003 another formatting.
\r
22011 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22012 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
22015 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
\r
22019 as described in section
\r
22020 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
22026 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
22031 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
22037 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22038 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22048 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22052 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
\r
22053 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
\r
22059 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
22063 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22073 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22077 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
\r
22078 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
\r
22086 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22087 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
22093 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22094 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
\r
22096 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
\r
22103 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22111 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
22112 Mathematical Formulas
\r
22113 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22123 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
22156 LatexCommand label
\r
22157 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
22164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22165 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
\r
22170 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
\r
22173 \begin_layout Section
\r
22174 Basic Math Editing
\r
22175 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22187 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22188 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
\r
22189 \begin_inset Info
\r
22191 arg "math-mode on"
\r
22195 \begin_inset Info
\r
22201 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
\r
22203 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
\r
22204 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
\r
22205 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
\r
22207 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22213 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22214 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
\r
22218 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22223 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
\r
22226 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22227 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
\r
22228 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
\r
22231 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22232 This is a line with an inline formula
\r
22233 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
\r
22239 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22240 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
\r
22241 paragraph, like this one:
\r
22242 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22249 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
\r
22252 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22253 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
\r
22254 For example, typing
\r
22255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22268 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
\r
22269 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
\r
22273 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
\r
22276 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22284 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22285 Navigating in Formulas
\r
22286 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22290 Math ! Navigating
\r
22298 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22299 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
\r
22300 achieved with the arrow keys.
\r
22301 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
\r
22302 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
\r
22307 will leave a formula construct (a square root
\r
22308 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
\r
22311 , or parentheses
\r
22312 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
\r
22316 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
22319 \end{array}\right]$
\r
22327 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
\r
22332 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
\r
22333 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
\r
22336 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22341 , printed in this document as
\r
22342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22363 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22367 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
\r
22368 the space character (visible space).
\r
22373 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
\r
22374 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
\r
22375 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
\r
22380 For example, if you want
\r
22381 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
\r
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22435 , since in the latter case only the
\r
22436 \family typewriter
\r
22438 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
\r
22443 will be under the square root sign:
\r
22444 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
\r
22450 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22451 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
\r
22453 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22455 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
\r
22459 \end{array}\right)
\r
22464 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
\r
22465 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
\r
22468 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22472 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22473 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
\r
22474 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
\r
22478 and a cursor movement key to select text.
\r
22479 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
\r
22480 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
\r
22481 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
\r
22482 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
\r
22485 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22486 Exponents and Subscripts
\r
22487 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22497 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22501 Math ! Subscripts
\r
22509 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22510 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
\r
22511 \begin_inset Info
\r
22513 arg "math-superscript"
\r
22517 \begin_inset Info
\r
22519 arg "math-subscript"
\r
22522 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
\r
22524 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
\r
22527 , type in a formula
\r
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22549 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
\r
22555 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
\r
22559 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
\r
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22580 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
\r
22582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22589 , you have to use an extra
\r
22593 to separate the circumflex and the character.
\r
22594 For example, if you want
\r
22595 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
\r
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22616 Subscripts are similar: To get
\r
22617 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
\r
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22640 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22642 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22654 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22655 Create a fraction either with the command
\r
22661 or by using the icon
\r
22662 \begin_inset Info
\r
22664 arg "math-insert \\frac"
\r
22670 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22676 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
\r
22677 The cursor is above the fraction line.
\r
22678 To move it to the bottom, simply press
\r
22683 To move back up, press
\r
22688 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
\r
22689 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22691 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
\r
22694 \end{array}\right)}\right]
\r
22702 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22704 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22716 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22717 Roots can be created using the
\r
22720 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22726 \begin_inset Info
\r
22728 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
\r
22732 \begin_inset Info
\r
22734 arg "math-insert \\root"
\r
22750 With the command
\r
22756 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
\r
22762 always produces a square root.
\r
22765 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22766 Operators with Limits
\r
22767 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22777 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
22788 LatexCommand label
\r
22789 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
\r
22796 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22798 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
\r
22802 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
\r
22805 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
\r
22806 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
\r
22807 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
\r
22808 The sum operator will automatically place its
\r
22809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22816 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
\r
22818 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
\r
22822 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22824 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
\r
22829 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
\r
22833 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22834 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
\r
22836 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
\r
22837 behind the operator and using the menu
\r
22839 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22840 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22846 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22852 \begin_inset Info
\r
22854 arg "math-limits"
\r
22860 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22861 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
\r
22862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22870 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22880 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22882 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
\r
22887 which will place the
\r
22888 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
\r
22892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22900 In inline formulas it looks like this:
\r
22901 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
\r
22907 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22908 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
\r
22915 Have a look at section
\r
22916 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
22922 reference "sub:Functions"
\r
22926 for an explanation of function macros.
\r
22929 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22931 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22943 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22944 Most math symbols can be found in the
\r
22947 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22952 under one of several categories; including
\r
22969 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
\r
22973 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22974 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
\r
22975 you don't have to use the
\r
22978 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22983 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
\r
22984 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
\r
22987 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22989 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23001 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23002 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
\r
23004 To do this, press
\r
23005 \begin_inset Info
\r
23007 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
23013 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23021 \begin_inset Info
\r
23023 arg "math-insert \\space"
\r
23029 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
\r
23030 For example, the sequence
\r
23035 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
\r
23038 appears in LyX as
\r
23039 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
23040 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
\r
23045 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
\r
23046 the space marker and enter space again several times.
\r
23047 With every space enter the size will be changed.
\r
23048 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
\r
23050 Here are two examples:
\r
23053 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23063 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
\r
23069 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23079 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
\r
23085 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23087 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23098 LatexCommand label
\r
23099 name "sub:Functions"
\r
23106 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23110 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23115 contains under the button
\r
23118 \begin_inset Info
\r
23120 arg "math-insert \\functions"
\r
23125 a number of function macros, such as
\r
23126 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
\r
23130 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
\r
23138 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
\r
23145 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
\r
23146 avoid confusions, because
\r
23147 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
\r
23150 does normally mean
\r
23151 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
\r
23157 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23158 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
\r
23160 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
\r
23163 is different from
\r
23164 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
\r
23170 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23171 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
\r
23172 are placed, as described in section
\r
23173 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
23179 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
\r
23186 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23188 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23200 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23201 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
\r
23203 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
\r
23204 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
\r
23205 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
\r
23208 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
\r
23209 Our example is entered by typing
\r
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23230 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
23236 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
\r
23240 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
\r
23243 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23244 \begin_inset Float table
\r
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23250 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23254 LatexCommand label
\r
23255 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
\r
23259 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
\r
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23269 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
23270 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
\r
23271 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
23272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23273 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23277 \begin_inset Text
\r
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23286 \begin_inset Text
\r
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23295 \begin_inset Text
\r
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23315 \begin_inset Text
\r
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23333 \begin_inset Text
\r
23335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23346 \begin_inset Text
\r
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23358 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
\r
23368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23369 \begin_inset Text
\r
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23387 \begin_inset Text
\r
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23400 \begin_inset Text
\r
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23412 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
\r
23422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23423 \begin_inset Text
\r
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23441 \begin_inset Text
\r
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23454 \begin_inset Text
\r
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23466 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
\r
23476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23477 \begin_inset Text
\r
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23495 \begin_inset Text
\r
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23508 \begin_inset Text
\r
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23520 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
\r
23530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23531 \begin_inset Text
\r
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23549 \begin_inset Text
\r
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23562 \begin_inset Text
\r
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23574 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
\r
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23585 \begin_inset Text
\r
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23603 \begin_inset Text
\r
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23616 \begin_inset Text
\r
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23628 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
\r
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23639 \begin_inset Text
\r
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23657 \begin_inset Text
\r
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23670 \begin_inset Text
\r
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23682 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
\r
23692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23693 \begin_inset Text
\r
23695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23711 \begin_inset Text
\r
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23724 \begin_inset Text
\r
23726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23736 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
\r
23746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23747 \begin_inset Text
\r
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23765 \begin_inset Text
\r
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23778 \begin_inset Text
\r
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23790 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
\r
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23801 \begin_inset Text
\r
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23810 \begin_inset Text
\r
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23823 \begin_inset Text
\r
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23835 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
\r
23856 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23857 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
\r
23860 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23865 symbol set button
\r
23866 \begin_inset Info
\r
23868 arg "math-insert \\hat"
\r
23871 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
\r
23875 \begin_layout Section
\r
23876 Brackets and Delimiters
\r
23877 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23887 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23891 Math ! Delimiters
\r
23897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23898 LatexCommand label
\r
23899 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
\r
23906 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23907 There are several brackets available through LyX.
\r
23908 For some purposes, using just the keys
\r
23909 \family typewriter
\r
23913 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
\r
23914 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
\r
23915 toolbar delimiter icon
\r
23916 \begin_inset Info
\r
23918 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
\r
23922 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
\r
23923 \begin_inset Formula
\r
23925 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
23928 \end{array}\right]
\r
23933 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
\r
23934 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
\r
23936 \begin_inset Info
\r
23938 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
\r
23941 and the expression on the right was entered using the
\r
23942 \family typewriter
\r
23947 \begin_inset Formula
\r
23949 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
\r
23957 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23958 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
\r
23959 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
\r
23963 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23964 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
\r
23965 left side and right side.
\r
23966 If you use the option
\r
23969 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23974 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
\r
23975 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
\r
23976 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
\r
23981 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
\r
23984 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23985 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
\r
23986 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
\r
23987 is to go inside the brackets.
\r
23988 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
\r
23993 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
\r
23994 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
\r
23995 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
\r
23997 \begin_inset Info
\r
23999 arg "math-delim ( )"
\r
24005 \begin_layout Section
\r
24006 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
\r
24007 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24017 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24027 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24031 Math ! Multi-line Equations
\r
24039 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24040 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
\r
24043 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24051 \begin_inset Info
\r
24053 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
\r
24059 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
\r
24060 Here is an example:
\r
24061 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24063 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
\r
24067 \end{array}\right)
\r
24072 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
\r
24073 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24079 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
\r
24084 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
\r
24085 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
\r
24086 This alignment is set in the box
\r
24090 with the letters
\r
24091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24139 for every column as default.
\r
24140 For example, the sequence
\r
24141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24152 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
\r
24153 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
\r
24154 corresponds to the relevant column.
\r
24155 The result will look like this:
\r
24156 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24158 \begin{array}{lcr}
\r
24159 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
\r
24160 column & has & has\, right\\
\r
24161 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
\r
24170 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24171 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
\r
24172 \begin_inset Info
\r
24174 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24177 while the cursor is in the matrix.
\r
24178 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
\r
24180 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24183 or the math toolbar.
\r
24186 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24187 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
\r
24188 It can be created with the menu
\r
24190 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24191 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24193 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24205 Here is an example:
\r
24206 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24208 f(x)=\begin{cases}
\r
24220 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24221 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
24224 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
\r
24225 \begin_inset Info
\r
24227 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24230 within a formula.
\r
24231 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
\r
24234 \begin_inset Info
\r
24236 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24239 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
\r
24240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24247 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
\r
24248 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
\r
24249 A new row is created by every further entry of
\r
24250 \begin_inset Info
\r
24252 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24256 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
\r
24257 Here is an example:
\r
24258 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24260 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
\r
24261 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
\r
24266 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
\r
24267 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
\r
24268 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24269 \begin{eqnarray*}
\r
24270 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
\r
24278 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24279 The multi-line formula type described here is called
\r
24280 \family typewriter
\r
24286 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
\r
24287 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
\r
24288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24289 LatexCommand eqref
\r
24290 reference "eq:asquared"
\r
24295 The other types are described in section
\r
24296 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24302 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
\r
24309 \begin_layout Section
\r
24310 Formula Numbering and Referencing
\r
24311 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24315 Math ! Formula numbering
\r
24321 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24325 Math ! Referencing formulas
\r
24331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
24332 LatexCommand label
\r
24333 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
\r
24340 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24341 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
\r
24343 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24344 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24346 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24350 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24356 \begin_inset Info
\r
24358 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24362 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
\r
24363 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
\r
24364 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
\r
24365 the document class.
\r
24366 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
\r
24367 separated by a dot:
\r
24368 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24376 \begin_inset Info
\r
24378 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24381 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
\r
24382 You can only number displayed formulas.
\r
24385 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24386 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
\r
24388 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24389 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24391 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24395 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24401 \begin_inset Info
\r
24403 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
\r
24406 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
\r
24407 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24410 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
\r
24416 To number all lines use the shortcut
\r
24417 \begin_inset Info
\r
24419 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24425 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24426 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
24429 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
\r
24430 A label is inserted with the menu
\r
24432 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24436 \begin_inset Info
\r
24438 arg "label-insert"
\r
24441 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
\r
24442 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
\r
24443 It is recommended that you use the suggested
\r
24444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24455 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
\r
24456 label type when you have many labels in your document.
\r
24457 We inserted in the following example the label
\r
24458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24465 in the second line:
\r
24466 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24468 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
\r
24469 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
\r
24474 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
\r
24475 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
\r
24476 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
\r
24478 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24480 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24486 \begin_inset Info
\r
24488 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
24492 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
\r
24493 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
\r
24494 as the formula number:
\r
24497 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24498 This is a cross-reference to equation (
\r
24499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24501 reference "eq:tanhExp"
\r
24508 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24509 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
\r
24510 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24516 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
24521 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
\r
24529 \begin_layout Section
\r
24530 User defined math macros
\r
24531 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24543 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24544 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
\r
24545 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
\r
24546 Math macros are explained in section
\r
24549 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24561 \begin_layout Section
\r
24565 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
24567 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24579 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24580 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
\r
24581 To set a font in a formula, use the
\r
24584 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24592 \begin_inset Info
\r
24594 arg "math-insert \\font"
\r
24599 , or enter its command, listed in table
\r
24600 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24606 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
\r
24613 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24614 \begin_inset Float table
\r
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24620 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
24622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
24624 LatexCommand label
\r
24625 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
\r
24629 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
\r
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24639 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
24640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
\r
24641 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
24642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
24643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
24645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24646 \begin_inset Text
\r
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24655 \begin_inset Text
\r
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24666 \begin_inset Text
\r
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24675 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
\r
24683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24684 \begin_inset Text
\r
24686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24699 \begin_inset Text
\r
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24702 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
\r
24710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24711 \begin_inset Text
\r
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24726 \begin_inset Text
\r
24728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24729 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
\r
24737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24738 \begin_inset Text
\r
24740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24753 \begin_inset Text
\r
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24762 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
\r
24770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24771 \begin_inset Text
\r
24773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24786 \begin_inset Text
\r
24788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24789 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
\r
24797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24798 \begin_inset Text
\r
24800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24813 \begin_inset Text
\r
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24816 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
\r
24824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24825 \begin_inset Text
\r
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24840 \begin_inset Text
\r
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24850 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
\r
24858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24859 \begin_inset Text
\r
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24874 \begin_inset Text
\r
24876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24877 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
\r
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24886 \begin_inset Text
\r
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24911 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24912 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24920 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
\r
24936 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24937 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
\r
24938 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
\r
24943 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
\r
24944 space when you need a space in the box.
\r
24945 Here is an example where
\r
24946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24957 denotes the set of numbers:
\r
24958 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24960 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
\r
24968 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24969 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
\r
24970 You can, for example, put a character in
\r
24979 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
\r
24983 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
24986 So it is better not to use this feature.
\r
24989 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24990 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
\r
24991 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
\r
24995 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
24998 You can only print them emboldened using the command
\r
25004 , which works like the other typeface commands:
\r
25005 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
\r
25011 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25018 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
\r
25021 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25022 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
\r
25024 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25025 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25027 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25035 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25037 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25049 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25050 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
\r
25052 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
\r
25056 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25060 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25076 \begin_inset Info
\r
25078 arg "math-insert \\font"
\r
25084 \begin_inset Info
\r
25086 arg "font-default"
\r
25090 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
\r
25091 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
\r
25092 Here is an example:
\r
25093 \begin_inset Formula
\r
25095 f(x)=\begin{cases}
\r
25096 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
\r
25097 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
\r
25106 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25108 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25112 Math ! Font sizes
\r
25120 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25121 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
\r
25122 automatically chosen in most situations.
\r
25123 These are called
\r
25137 scriptscriptstyle
\r
25140 For most characters,
\r
25148 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
\r
25149 and certain other structures, are set larger in
\r
25154 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
\r
25155 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
\r
25157 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
\r
25160 \begin_inset Info
\r
25162 arg "math-insert \\style"
\r
25168 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
\r
25169 For example, you can set
\r
25170 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
\r
25173 , which is normally in
\r
25182 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
\r
25186 The four styles are used in the following example:
\r
25189 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25190 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
\r
25194 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
\r
25198 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
\r
25202 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
\r
25208 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25209 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
\r
25210 is set in a particular size with the menu
\r
25212 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25214 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25219 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
\r
25220 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
\r
25221 will be adjusted to correspond.
\r
25222 As an example here is a formula in the font size
\r
25223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25233 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25237 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
\r
25243 \begin_layout Section
\r
25245 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25255 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25267 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25268 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
\r
25269 (AMS) that are in common use.
\r
25272 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25273 Enabling AMS-Support
\r
25276 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25277 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
\r
25278 the document by selecting the checkbox
\r
25281 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25285 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25289 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25296 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25300 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25304 Document ! Settings
\r
25312 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25318 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
\r
25319 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
\r
25322 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25323 AMS-Formula Types
\r
25324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25325 LatexCommand label
\r
25326 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
\r
25331 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25335 Math ! Multi-line Equations
\r
25343 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25344 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
\r
25345 LyX allows you to choose between
\r
25346 \family typewriter
\r
25350 \family typewriter
\r
25354 \family typewriter
\r
25358 \family typewriter
\r
25362 \family typewriter
\r
25366 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
\r
25367 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
25368 LatexCommand cite
\r
25373 , for an explanation of these formula types.
\r
25376 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
25380 \begin_layout Section
\r
25382 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25393 LatexCommand label
\r
25394 name "sec:Cross-References"
\r
25401 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25402 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
\r
25403 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
\r
25405 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
\r
25406 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
\r
25407 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
\r
25410 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25414 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25416 LatexCommand label
\r
25417 name "enu:Second-item"
\r
25424 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25428 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25429 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
\r
25431 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25434 or by pressing the toolbar button
\r
25435 \begin_inset Info
\r
25437 arg "label-insert"
\r
25441 A gray label box like this:
\r
25442 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
25443 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
\r
25448 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
\r
25449 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
\r
25451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25484 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
\r
25485 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
\r
25487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25501 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25502 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
\r
25504 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25507 or the toolbar button
\r
25508 \begin_inset Info
\r
25510 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
25514 A gray cross-reference box like this:
\r
25515 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
25516 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
\r
25521 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
\r
25523 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
\r
25524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25536 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
\r
25540 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25541 As an alternative to
\r
25543 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25546 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
\r
25548 Copy as Reference
\r
25551 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
\r
25552 to the actual cursor position via the menu
\r
25554 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25558 \begin_inset Info
\r
25566 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25567 Here is our cross-reference: Item
\r
25568 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25574 reference "enu:Second-item"
\r
25581 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25582 It is recommended to use a protected space
\r
25583 \begin_inset Foot
\r
25586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25587 described in section
\r
25588 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25594 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
25603 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
\r
25604 line breaks between them.
\r
25607 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25608 There are six formats of cross-references:
\r
25611 \begin_layout Description
\r
25612 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
\r
25613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25615 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25622 \begin_layout Description
\r
25623 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
\r
25624 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
\r
25626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25635 LatexCommand eqref
\r
25636 reference "eq:tanhExp"
\r
25643 \begin_layout Description
\r
25644 <page>: prints the page number: Page
\r
25645 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25650 LatexCommand pageref
\r
25651 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25658 \begin_layout Description
\r
25660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25664 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25667 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
\r
25668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25669 LatexCommand vpageref
\r
25670 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25675 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25678 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
\r
25679 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
\r
25680 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
\r
25681 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
\r
25682 it prints “on the next page”.
\r
25683 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
\r
25686 \begin_layout Description
\r
25688 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25692 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25696 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25699 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
\r
25700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25701 LatexCommand vref
\r
25702 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25707 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25710 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
\r
25716 ; otherwise it behaves like
\r
25720 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25724 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25733 \begin_layout Description
\r
25735 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25738 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
\r
25739 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25751 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
\r
25760 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25764 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
25770 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25774 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
25785 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25788 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
\r
25791 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
\r
25795 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25796 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25804 is the default and preferred because
\r
25808 supports only English documents.
\r
25809 The format is specified by using the command
\r
25821 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
\r
25822 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
\r
25824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25835 ) can be done with this command
\r
25836 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25843 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
\r
25848 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25851 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
\r
25853 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
25854 LatexCommand cite
\r
25855 key "prettyref,refstyle"
\r
25862 \begin_layout Description
\r
25864 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25867 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
\r
25868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25869 LatexCommand nameref
\r
25870 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25877 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25878 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
\r
25879 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
\r
25880 The varieties are adjusted in the field
\r
25884 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
\r
25888 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25889 You can only use the style
\r
25893 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
\r
25897 is always possible.
\r
25900 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25901 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
\r
25902 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
\r
25904 Referencing formulas is explained in section
\r
25905 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25911 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
\r
25918 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25919 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
\r
25923 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25927 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25932 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
\r
25933 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
\r
25936 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25941 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
\r
25942 You can also go back with the toolbar button
\r
25943 \begin_inset Info
\r
25945 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
25951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25952 You can change labels at any time.
\r
25953 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
\r
25954 do not need to think about this.
\r
25957 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25958 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
\r
25959 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
\r
25960 instead of the reference.
\r
25963 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25964 References are described in detail in the section
\r
25965 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25972 Referencing Floats
\r
25973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25979 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25987 \begin_layout Section
\r
25988 Table of Contents and other Listings
\r
25989 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25993 Table of contents
\r
25999 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26010 LatexCommand label
\r
26018 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26019 Table of Contents
\r
26020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26021 LatexCommand label
\r
26022 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
\r
26029 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26030 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
\r
26032 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26033 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26035 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26039 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26045 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
\r
26046 If you click on it, the
\r
26050 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
\r
26051 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
\r
26052 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
\r
26054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26057 that is described in section
\r
26058 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26064 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
\r
26071 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26072 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
\r
26073 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
\r
26075 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26081 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
26085 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
\r
26087 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26093 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
26097 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
\r
26098 listed in the TOC.
\r
26099 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
\r
26102 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26103 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
\r
26104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26105 LatexCommand label
\r
26106 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
\r
26113 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26114 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
\r
26115 You can insert them via the
\r
26117 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26121 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
\r
26124 \begin_layout Section
\r
26125 URLs and Hyperlinks
\r
26126 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26136 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26148 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26151 LatexCommand label
\r
26159 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26160 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
\r
26162 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26168 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26169 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
\r
26170 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
26173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26175 http://www.lyx.org
\r
26183 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26184 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
\r
26186 \family typewriter
\r
26190 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
\r
26194 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26195 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
26198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26203 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
\r
26211 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26214 LatexCommand label
\r
26215 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
\r
26222 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26223 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
\r
26225 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26228 or with the toolbar button
\r
26229 \begin_inset Info
\r
26231 arg "href-insert"
\r
26235 The appearing dialog has two fields:
\r
26244 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
\r
26245 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
\r
26246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26247 LatexCommand href
\r
26248 name "LyX's homepage"
\r
26249 target "http://www.lyx.org"
\r
26253 , an Email address like this:
\r
26254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26255 LatexCommand href
\r
26256 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
\r
26257 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
\r
26262 , or a link to a file.
\r
26265 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26266 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
\r
26267 adding the prefix
\r
26268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26279 to the link target.
\r
26282 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26283 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
\r
26284 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
\r
26285 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
\r
26286 the text style dialog.
\r
26287 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
\r
26291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26292 LatexCommand href
\r
26293 name "LyX's homepage"
\r
26294 target "http://www.lyx.org"
\r
26301 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26302 The link text color can be changed, when the option
\r
26306 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
\r
26308 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26309 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26313 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
\r
26315 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26323 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26328 Additional options
\r
26330 in the PDF Properties dialog.
\r
26333 \begin_layout Section
\r
26335 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26346 LatexCommand label
\r
26347 name "sec:Appendices"
\r
26354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26355 Appendices are created with the menu
\r
26357 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26359 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26363 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26369 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
\r
26370 as the appendix part of the book.
\r
26371 This part is marked with a red borderline.
\r
26374 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26375 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
\r
26376 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
\r
26377 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
\r
26378 and the subsection number.
\r
26379 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
\r
26380 here two examples:
\r
26383 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26385 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26391 reference "chap:Credits"
\r
26396 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26402 reference "sub:Export"
\r
26409 \begin_layout Section
\r
26411 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26422 LatexCommand label
\r
26423 name "sec:Bibliography"
\r
26430 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26431 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
\r
26432 You can include a bibliography database,
\r
26433 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26437 Known under the name
\r
26438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26450 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
\r
26451 manually, using the paragraph environment
\r
26455 , which was described in section
\r
26456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26462 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
\r
26467 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
\r
26468 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
\r
26472 use a bibliography database.
\r
26475 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26476 The Bibliography Environment
\r
26479 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26484 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
\r
26486 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
\r
26495 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
\r
26497 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
\r
26499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26506 , a short form of its title, as the key.
\r
26509 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26510 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
\r
26512 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26515 or the toolbar button
\r
26516 \begin_inset Info
\r
26518 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
\r
26522 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
\r
26523 containing the available citations.
\r
26524 Select one or more keys from the list and
\r
26534 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
\r
26535 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
\r
26539 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26540 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
\r
26541 entry with surrounding brackets.
\r
26546 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
\r
26547 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
\r
26549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26559 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26560 Have a look at the
\r
26562 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
\r
26565 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26566 LatexCommand cite
\r
26567 key "latexcompanion"
\r
26574 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26575 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
\r
26576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26577 LatexCommand cite
\r
26585 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26586 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
\r
26587 label via the menu
\r
26589 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26591 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26597 \begin_inset Info
\r
26599 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
26603 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
\r
26606 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26607 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
\r
26608 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26612 Bibliography ! Databases
\r
26618 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26622 Bibliography ! BibTeX
\r
26628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26629 LatexCommand label
\r
26630 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
26637 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26638 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
\r
26640 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26644 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
\r
26646 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
\r
26647 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
\r
26652 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
\r
26654 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
\r
26655 your working field in a database.
\r
26656 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
\r
26657 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
\r
26658 list for that document.
\r
26659 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
\r
26663 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26664 The database is a text file with the file extension
\r
26665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26676 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
\r
26677 The format is explained in
\r
26678 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26679 LatexCommand cite
\r
26684 and in the LaTeX books (
\r
26685 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26686 LatexCommand cite
\r
26687 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
\r
26692 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
\r
26693 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
\r
26694 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
\r
26695 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
26698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26700 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
\r
26708 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26709 To use a database, use the menu
\r
26711 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26716 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26729 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26735 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
\r
26736 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
\r
26743 Add bibliography to TOC
\r
26745 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
\r
26750 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
\r
26751 in the document or just the cited references.
\r
26754 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26755 The style file is a text file with the file extension
\r
26756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26767 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
\r
26768 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
\r
26769 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
\r
26771 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
\r
26773 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26777 For information on how this is done, have a look at
\r
26778 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26783 LatexCommand href
\r
26784 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
\r
26796 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26797 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
\r
26800 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26801 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
\r
26802 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
\r
26808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26809 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26814 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26815 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26816 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26831 The following variants are possible:
\r
26834 \begin_layout Description
\r
26835 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
\r
26836 with other bibliography packages (e.
\r
26837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
26841 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
26848 ), only with the package
\r
26852 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
\r
26856 \begin_layout Description
\r
26857 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
\r
26858 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
\r
26859 with all bibliography packages, except
\r
26864 \begin_layout Description
\r
26865 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
\r
26866 larger memory than
\r
26870 , works with all bibliography packages
\r
26873 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26874 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
\r
26876 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
\r
26882 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26883 LatexCommand cite
\r
26891 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26892 When you select the option
\r
26894 Sectioned bibliography
\r
26898 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26899 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26902 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
\r
26903 This and other options are explained in detail in section
\r
26905 Customizing Bibliographies
\r
26913 Additional Features
\r
26918 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26919 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
\r
26920 the two methods of creating them.
\r
26921 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
\r
26922 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
\r
26923 We used the style file
\r
26927 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
\r
26930 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26931 Bibliography layout
\r
26932 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26936 Bibliography ! Layout
\r
26944 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26945 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
\r
26946 For this feature you need to enable the option
\r
26952 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26956 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26960 Document ! Settings
\r
26970 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
\r
26971 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
\r
26972 in the previous section.
\r
26975 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26976 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
\r
26977 the citation reference window.
\r
26978 Here is an example where the text
\r
26979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26983 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26990 appears after the reference:
\r
26993 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26995 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26996 LatexCommand cite
\r
26997 after "Chapter 3"
\r
26998 key "latexcompanion"
\r
27005 \begin_layout Section
\r
27007 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
27018 LatexCommand label
\r
27026 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27027 An index entry is created if you use the menu
\r
27029 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27031 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27036 or the toolbar button
\r
27037 \begin_inset Info
\r
27039 arg "index-insert"
\r
27043 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
\r
27044 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
\r
27045 by LyX as the index entry.
\r
27048 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27049 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
\r
27051 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27052 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27054 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27060 A light blue box labeled
\r
27061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27072 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
\r
27073 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
\r
27076 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27077 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
\r
27078 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
\r
27079 of the LaTeX books
\r
27080 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27081 LatexCommand cite
\r
27082 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
\r
27089 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27090 Grouping Index Entries
\r
27091 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27103 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27104 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
\r
27106 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
\r
27107 lists under the entry
\r
27108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27116 First we create the entry
\r
27117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27125 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27131 reference "sub:Lists"
\r
27136 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
\r
27137 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27143 reference "sec:Itemize"
\r
27147 , we insert the command
\r
27150 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27156 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27160 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27163 Lists ! Enumerate
\r
27166 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27167 for the enumerated list in section
\r
27168 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27174 reference "sec:Enumerate"
\r
27181 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27182 The exclamation mark
\r
27183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27190 marks the grouping levels.
\r
27191 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
\r
27192 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
\r
27193 If we don't have an index entry for
\r
27194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27201 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
\r
27204 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27206 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27210 Index ! Page ranges
\r
27218 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27219 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
\r
27221 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
\r
27222 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
\r
27223 an index entry in section
\r
27224 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27230 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
27237 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27240 Paragraph environments|(
\r
27243 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27244 and another entry at the end of section
\r
27245 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27251 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
\r
27258 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27261 Paragraph environments|)
\r
27264 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27289 respectively start and end the index range.
\r
27290 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
\r
27291 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
\r
27292 the pages of the indexed document parts.
\r
27293 An example is the index entry
\r
27294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27297 Document ! Settings
\r
27298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27304 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27305 Cross referencing
\r
27306 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27310 Index ! Cross referencing
\r
27318 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27319 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
\r
27320 We referred for example in the index entry
\r
27321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27329 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27335 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
\r
27339 ) to the index entry
\r
27340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27347 in the same section using the entry
\r
27350 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27353 GIF|see{Image formats}
\r
27356 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27357 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
\r
27358 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
\r
27359 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
\r
27362 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27363 Index Entry Order
\r
27364 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27368 Index ! Entry order
\r
27376 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27377 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
\r
27378 follow the rules for the index order.
\r
27379 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
\r
27380 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27384 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
\r
27386 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27392 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27401 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
\r
27402 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
\r
27403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27427 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27431 Dummy entries ! maïs
\r
27437 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27441 Dummy entries ! maître
\r
27447 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27451 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
\r
27456 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
\r
27457 maïs, maison, maître.
\r
27458 To achieve this, we use the command
\r
27461 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27464 previous entry@current entry
\r
27467 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27468 In our case we want to have
\r
27469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27484 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
\r
27487 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27493 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27494 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
\r
27495 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
\r
27496 See the next subsection for an example.
\r
27499 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27500 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
27506 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27507 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
\r
27512 to generate the index (see sec.
\r
27513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27519 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27528 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
\r
27530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27536 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
27540 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
\r
27541 index commands start with
\r
27542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27554 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
\r
27559 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
\r
27562 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27574 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27586 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27587 Index Entry Layout
\r
27588 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27592 Index ! Entry layout
\r
27600 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27601 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
\r
27602 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27608 This is an italic dummy entry
\r
27613 You can also format the page number using the character
\r
27614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27621 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
\r
27622 We can write for example
\r
27625 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27628 italic page number:|textit
\r
27631 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27632 to get the page number in italic.
\r
27633 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27637 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
\r
27642 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
\r
27644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27666 Have a look at section
\r
27667 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27673 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
27677 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
\r
27680 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27681 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
27684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27689 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
\r
27693 to generate the index, see sec.
\r
27694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27700 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27709 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
\r
27714 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
\r
27715 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27716 LatexCommand cite
\r
27717 after "p. 678 ff."
\r
27718 key "latexcompanion"
\r
27730 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27731 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
\r
27733 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
\r
27734 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
\r
27735 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
\r
27736 If so, put the following in the preamble
\r
27739 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27751 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27755 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27758 my entry|IndexDef
\r
27761 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27762 in the index entry.
\r
27763 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27767 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
\r
27772 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
\r
27773 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
\r
27774 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
\r
27777 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27778 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
\r
27779 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
\r
27780 a bold font for all index entries.
\r
27781 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
\r
27793 documentation for details,
\r
27794 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27795 LatexCommand cite
\r
27796 key "makeindex,xindy"
\r
27803 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27805 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
27816 LatexCommand label
\r
27817 name "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27824 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27825 If the index generation program
\r
27829 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
\r
27833 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
\r
27834 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27842 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
\r
27843 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
\r
27844 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
\r
27845 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
\r
27846 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
\r
27856 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
\r
27857 dialog, see section
\r
27858 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27864 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
27869 The available options are listed and explained in
\r
27870 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27871 LatexCommand cite
\r
27872 key "makeindex,xindy"
\r
27877 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
\r
27881 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27882 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
\r
27883 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
27884 or the options in
\r
27886 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27887 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27891 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
\r
27892 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
\r
27895 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27899 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27900 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
\r
27901 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
\r
27902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27909 next to the standard index.
\r
27910 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
\r
27911 that add this feature.
\r
27917 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27921 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
\r
27926 package to generate multiple indexes.
\r
27927 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
\r
27928 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27932 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
\r
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27934 LatexCommand cite
\r
27935 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
27940 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
\r
27941 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
\r
27942 Please consult the package's manual for details.
\r
27950 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27951 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
\r
27953 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27954 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27957 and select the option
\r
27959 Use multiple Indexes
\r
27962 Note that the list
\r
27964 Available Indexes
\r
27966 already contains the standard index
\r
27967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27975 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
\r
27976 also appear as a heading) to the
\r
27980 input field and press the
\r
27985 The new index now also appears in the list.
\r
27986 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
\r
27990 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27991 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
\r
27994 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28001 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
\r
28002 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
\r
28003 are additional features:
\r
28006 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
28007 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
\r
28008 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
\r
28011 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
28012 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
\r
28013 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
\r
28014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28021 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
\r
28022 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
\r
28023 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
\r
28024 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
\r
28027 \begin_layout Section
\r
28028 Nomenclature/Glossary
\r
28029 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28039 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28072 LatexCommand label
\r
28073 name "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
28080 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28081 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
\r
28082 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
\r
28083 called nomenclature or glossary.
\r
28086 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28087 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
\r
28093 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28097 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
\r
28103 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
\r
28104 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28105 LatexCommand cite
\r
28106 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
28110 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
28113 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28114 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
\r
28115 and then use the menu
\r
28117 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28123 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28128 or the toolbar button
\r
28129 \begin_inset Info
\r
28131 arg "nomencl-insert"
\r
28135 A gray box labeled
\r
28136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28147 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
\r
28150 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28151 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
\r
28152 The first is the term or
\r
28156 that you wish to define.
\r
28157 The second is the
\r
28161 of the term or symbol.
\r
28164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
28168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28173 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
\r
28181 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28182 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
\r
28183 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28187 Nomenclature ! Layout
\r
28195 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28196 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
\r
28200 field as LaTeX-formulas.
\r
28201 For example to get
\r
28202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28206 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28214 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28222 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28235 character starts/ends the formula.
\r
28236 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
\r
28237 with a backslash
\r
28238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28248 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
\r
28258 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28259 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
\r
28260 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
28266 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
28273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28274 You cannot use the
\r
28277 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28282 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
\r
28283 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
\r
28284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28288 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28295 in this document is:
\r
28296 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28301 dummy entry for the character
\r
28306 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28315 sets the fonts to
\r
28318 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28328 font use the command
\r
28335 \family typewriter
\r
28357 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28358 If the characters |
\r
28359 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28363 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28367 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28371 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28375 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28378 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
\r
28379 a quote character in front of them.
\r
28380 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28381 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28382 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
\r
28383 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
\r
28390 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28391 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
\r
28392 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28396 Nomenclature ! Sort order
\r
28404 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28405 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
\r
28406 the symbol definition.
\r
28407 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
\r
28409 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
\r
28412 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28413 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28415 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
\r
28422 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28426 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28427 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28429 symbol "$\\sigma$"
\r
28430 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
\r
28435 They will be sorted by
\r
28436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28452 \family typewriter
\r
28458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28462 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28465 will be sorted before the
\r
28469 since the character
\r
28470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28477 is considered in sorting.
\r
28480 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28481 To control the sort order, you can edit the
\r
28484 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28489 field of the nomenclature dialog.
\r
28490 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
\r
28492 For the example given, you can insert
\r
28493 \family typewriter
\r
28496 in this field for the
\r
28497 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28504 will be located before
\r
28505 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28512 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
\r
28517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28518 LatexCommand cite
\r
28526 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28527 Nomenclature Options
\r
28528 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28532 Nomenclature ! Options
\r
28540 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28545 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
\r
28546 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
\r
28549 \begin_layout Description
\r
28550 refeq Appends the phrase
\r
28551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28566 to every nomenclature entry, where
\r
28572 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
\r
28575 \begin_layout Description
\r
28576 refpage Appends the phrase
\r
28577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28592 to every nomenclature entry, where
\r
28598 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
\r
28601 \begin_layout Description
\r
28602 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
\r
28605 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28606 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
\r
28607 class options list in the
\r
28609 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28613 In this document the options
\r
28620 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28621 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
28627 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28628 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
\r
28629 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
\r
28634 field in the nomenclature dialog:
\r
28637 \begin_layout Description
\r
28640 nomrefeq Like the
\r
28647 \begin_layout Description
\r
28650 nomrefpage Like the
\r
28657 \begin_layout Description
\r
28660 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
\r
28669 \begin_layout Description
\r
28673 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28679 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28684 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
\r
28687 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28696 are automatically translated for some document languages.
\r
28697 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
\r
28700 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28708 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
\r
28710 nobreakspace(#1)}
\r
28711 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28718 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
\r
28720 nobreakspace{}#1}
\r
28723 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28742 by their translation.
\r
28745 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28746 Printing the Nomenclature
\r
28747 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28751 Nomenclature ! Printing
\r
28759 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28760 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
\r
28762 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28763 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28779 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
\r
28780 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
\r
28781 You can choose between these settings:
\r
28784 \begin_layout Description
\r
28785 Default a space of 1
\r
28786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
28792 \begin_layout Description
\r
28794 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28798 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28801 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
\r
28804 \begin_layout Description
\r
28805 Custom custom space
\r
28808 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28809 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
\r
28810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28818 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
\r
28826 For example, in order to change the name to
\r
28830 , add the following line to the preamble:
\r
28833 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28841 nomname}{List of Symbols}
\r
28844 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28845 Nomenclature Program
\r
28846 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28850 Nomenclature ! Program
\r
28856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28857 LatexCommand label
\r
28858 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
\r
28865 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28866 LyX uses the program
\r
28870 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
\r
28871 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
\r
28876 by adding options, see section
\r
28877 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
28883 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
28888 The available options are listed and explained in
\r
28889 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28890 LatexCommand cite
\r
28891 key "nomencl,makeindex"
\r
28898 \begin_layout Section
\r
28900 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28910 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28914 Document ! Branches
\r
28920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28921 LatexCommand label
\r
28922 name "sec:Branches"
\r
28929 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28930 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
\r
28931 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
\r
28932 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
\r
28933 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
\r
28936 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28937 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
\r
28938 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
\r
28939 To create a branch, either select the menu
\r
28941 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28942 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28943 Insert New Branch
\r
28945 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
\r
28947 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28954 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
\r
28955 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
\r
28956 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
\r
28957 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
\r
28958 (see below for an example).
\r
28959 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
\r
28960 to the name of the other) and to add
\r
28961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
28973 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28976 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
\r
28977 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
\r
28980 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28981 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
\r
28982 These boxes are inserted via the menu
\r
28984 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28987 where you can choose a branch.
\r
28988 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
\r
28992 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28993 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
\r
28994 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
\r
28997 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28998 \begin_inset Branch Question
\r
29001 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29002 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
\r
29010 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29011 \begin_inset Branch Answer
\r
29014 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29015 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
\r
29023 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29030 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29031 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29034 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
\r
29035 Consider for example a file
\r
29036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29043 which has the above branches.
\r
29045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29052 is active, the PDF export file would be called
\r
29053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29076 branch were inactive,
\r
29077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29080 Exam-Question.pdf
\r
29081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29092 branch was active, likewise
\r
29093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29108 branch was active, and
\r
29109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29112 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
\r
29113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29116 if both branches were active.
\r
29117 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
\r
29120 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29121 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
29127 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29128 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
\r
29129 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
\r
29131 For example you can define for the question branch
\r
29132 \begin_inset Foot
\r
29135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29136 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
\r
29137 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
29143 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
29155 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29165 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29175 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29176 and for the answer branch
\r
29179 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29189 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29199 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29200 \begin_inset Branch Question
\r
29203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29235 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29236 \begin_inset Branch Answer
\r
29239 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29271 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29272 Now it is possible to use the
\r
29276 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
29283 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
29286 commands to obtain conditional output.
\r
29287 Here is an example formula where only the
\r
29294 \begin_inset Formula
\r
29296 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
\r
29304 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29305 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
\r
29313 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29314 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
\r
29316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
29320 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
29323 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
\r
29324 For this advanced usage, see the
\r
29329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29332 Flex insets and InsetLayout
\r
29333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29339 \begin_layout Section
\r
29341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29342 LatexCommand label
\r
29343 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
\r
29348 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29360 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29363 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29364 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29367 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
\r
29369 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
29374 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29378 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
29383 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
\r
29384 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
\r
29385 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
\r
29386 part of the document.
\r
29390 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29391 The header information in the dialog tab
\r
29395 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
\r
29396 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
\r
29397 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
\r
29398 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
\r
29402 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29406 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29411 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
\r
29412 title and author entries.
\r
29416 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29420 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29424 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29429 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
\r
29432 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29433 You can specify in the dialog tab
\r
29437 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
\r
29442 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29446 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29450 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29455 option allows long links to be split;
\r
29458 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29462 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29466 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29474 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29479 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
\r
29482 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29487 colors the different links.
\r
29488 The default colors are:
\r
29491 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29492 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29497 for hyperlinks and URLs
\r
29500 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29509 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29510 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29518 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29519 but you can change these in the field
\r
29521 Additional options
\r
29524 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
\r
29527 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29530 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
\r
29533 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29538 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
\r
29539 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
\r
29540 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
\r
29543 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29544 In the dialog tab
\r
29548 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
\r
29549 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
\r
29550 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
\r
29560 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
\r
29561 when opening the PDF.
\r
29562 For example level
\r
29563 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29566 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
\r
29567 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29570 1 will only display the sections.
\r
29573 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29574 PDF properties are also used in this document.
\r
29575 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
\r
29580 options are used.
\r
29581 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
\r
29582 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29583 LatexCommand cite
\r
29591 \begin_layout Section
\r
29592 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
\r
29593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29594 LatexCommand label
\r
29595 name "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
29602 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
29604 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29615 LatexCommand label
\r
29616 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
\r
29623 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29624 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
\r
29625 constructs, but not all.
\r
29626 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
\r
29627 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
\r
29628 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
\r
29629 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
\r
29630 and their commands.
\r
29633 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29634 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
\r
29636 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
\r
29638 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29656 or by the toolbar button
\r
29657 \begin_inset Info
\r
29663 \begin_inset Info
\r
29669 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
\r
29670 it and selecting
\r
29677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29678 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
\r
29679 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
\r
29680 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
\r
29681 using the LaTeX-command
\r
29687 , you can write the command part
\r
29693 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
\r
29697 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
\r
29698 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
\r
29699 the following example:
\r
29702 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29703 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
29704 filename clipart/ERT.png
\r
29712 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29716 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29717 This is a line with a
\r
29721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29744 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
29748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29753 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
\r
29754 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
\r
29762 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
29763 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
\r
29764 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
29767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29774 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29785 LatexCommand label
\r
29786 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
29793 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29794 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
\r
29795 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
\r
29796 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
\r
29797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29805 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
\r
29806 any time if you know the right commands.
\r
29807 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
\r
29808 is the end of the day.
\r
29809 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
\r
29810 all caption labels bold.
\r
29811 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
\r
29813 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
\r
29817 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29818 Now LaTeX comes into play.
\r
29819 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
\r
29820 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
\r
29822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29823 LatexCommand cite
\r
29831 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29832 As result you find that the package
\r
29837 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29841 LaTeX-packages ! caption
\r
29846 is what you need.
\r
29847 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
\r
29849 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29852 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29867 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29872 ) with the command
\r
29875 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29880 usepackage[options]{package name}
\r
29883 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29884 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
\r
29885 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
\r
29886 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
\r
29889 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29890 In your case the package name is
\r
29895 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
\r
29900 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
\r
29901 So you add the command
\r
29904 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29909 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
\r
29912 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29913 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
\r
29914 \begin_inset Foot
\r
29917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29918 For more commands provided by the
\r
29922 package, have a look at its documentation,
\r
29923 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29924 LatexCommand cite
\r
29937 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29938 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
\r
29940 For example if you use a
\r
29944 class, you don't need the package
\r
29948 , you can instead write
\r
29951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29956 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
\r
29961 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29962 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
\r
29963 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
\r
29964 documentation of the document class you want to use.
\r
29971 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
\r
29974 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29975 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
\r
29976 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
\r
29978 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
\r
29979 the previous section.
\r
29982 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29983 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
\r
29985 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29986 LatexCommand cite
\r
29987 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
\r
29994 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29995 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
\r
30001 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30015 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
30018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30019 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
\r
30027 \begin_layout Left Header
\r
30028 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30051 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
30054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30055 defines the header line as described below
\r
30063 \begin_layout Center Header
\r
30064 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30076 \begin_layout Right Header
\r
30077 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30101 \begin_layout Left Footer
\r
30102 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30126 \begin_layout Center Footer
\r
30127 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30141 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
30145 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
\r
30151 \begin_layout Right Footer
\r
30152 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30177 \begin_layout Section
\r
30178 Customized Page Headers and Footers
\r
30179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
30180 LatexCommand label
\r
30181 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
\r
30186 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30190 Document ! Header/Footer line
\r
30196 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30200 Header/Footer line
\r
30208 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30209 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
\r
30213 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30224 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30230 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30236 As a second step add in the menu
\r
30238 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30239 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30246 Custom Header/Footerlines
\r
30247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
30251 This module offers the following 6
\r
30252 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30258 \begin_layout Description
\r
30260 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30268 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30272 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30276 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30282 \begin_layout Description
\r
30284 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30288 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30292 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30296 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30300 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30306 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30307 for the different positions in the header/footer.
\r
30310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30311 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
\r
30312 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
\r
30314 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
30320 reference "fig:Page-layout"
\r
30324 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
\r
30327 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30328 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
30334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30337 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
30338 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
\r
30339 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
30340 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30341 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30342 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30345 \begin_inset Text
\r
30347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30354 \begin_inset Text
\r
30356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30362 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30363 \begin_inset Text
\r
30365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30374 \begin_inset Text
\r
30376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30383 \begin_inset Text
\r
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30391 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30392 \begin_inset Text
\r
30394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30402 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
\r
30403 \begin_inset Text
\r
30405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30406 The normal text on the page goes here.
\r
30407 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
\r
30409 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
\r
30410 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
\r
30415 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30416 \begin_inset Text
\r
30418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30424 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30425 \begin_inset Text
\r
30427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30436 \begin_inset Text
\r
30438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30445 \begin_inset Text
\r
30447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30453 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30454 \begin_inset Text
\r
30456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30464 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30465 \begin_inset Text
\r
30467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30474 \begin_inset Text
\r
30476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30482 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30483 \begin_inset Text
\r
30485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30500 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
30502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
30504 LatexCommand label
\r
30505 name "fig:Page-layout"
\r
30509 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
\r
30522 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
30526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30531 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
\r
30535 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30540 is set to “Default”.
\r
30541 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
\r
30550 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30554 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30555 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
\r
30556 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
\r
30557 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
\r
30558 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
\r
30560 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
\r
30561 Defining the footer line works similarly.
\r
30564 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30565 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
\r
30566 as TeX code (menu
\r
30568 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30581 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30589 \begin_layout Description
\r
30592 thepage prints the current page number
\r
30595 \begin_layout Description
\r
30598 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
\r
30601 \begin_layout Description
\r
30604 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
\r
30607 \begin_layout Description
\r
30610 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
\r
30611 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
\r
30614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30618 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
30621 because it usually goes in a left header.
\r
30624 \begin_layout Description
\r
30627 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
\r
30628 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
\r
30630 It is normally used in the right header.
\r
30633 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30634 Default header/footer
\r
30637 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30638 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
\r
30639 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
\r
30640 footer has the page number.
\r
30641 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
\r
30642 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
\r
30643 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
\r
30646 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30654 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30658 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30659 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
\r
30660 Some pages are different.
\r
30661 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
\r
30662 a new part or chapter in your book.
\r
30663 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
\r
30664 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
\r
30665 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
\r
30668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
30669 Header and footer decoration line
\r
30672 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30673 By default, you get a 0.4
\r
30674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30677 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
\r
30678 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
\r
30690 in the following way:
\r
30693 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30700 headrulewidth}{thickness}
\r
30703 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30704 where thickness is a size in standard units like
\r
30713 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
\r
30714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30720 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30721 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
\r
30722 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
\r
30723 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30727 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30728 LatexCommand cite
\r
30736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
30737 Several header/footer lines
\r
30740 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30741 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
\r
30742 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
\r
30743 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
\r
30745 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
\r
30757 in this entry in
\r
30759 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30760 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30773 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30781 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30788 headheight}{height}
\r
30791 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30792 where height is a size in standard units.
\r
30793 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
\r
30794 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
\r
30795 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
\r
30797 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30811 and use the button
\r
30814 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30819 to see if you can find a warning about the package
\r
30824 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30828 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
30834 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
\r
30835 for your header/footer.
\r
30838 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30842 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30843 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
\r
30844 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
\r
30845 This example consists of the following definition:
\r
30848 \begin_layout Description
\r
30850 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30859 , empty optional argument
\r
30862 \begin_layout Description
\r
30864 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30867 Header empty, empty optional argument
\r
30870 \begin_layout Description
\r
30872 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30881 in the optional argument
\r
30884 \begin_layout Description
\r
30886 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30895 in the optional argument
\r
30898 \begin_layout Description
\r
30900 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30916 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
30920 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
\r
30924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
30927 in the optional argument
\r
30930 \begin_layout Description
\r
30932 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30941 , empty optional argument
\r
30944 \begin_layout Description
\r
30947 headrulewidth set to 2
\r
30948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30954 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30955 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
\r
30956 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
\r
30962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30963 LatexCommand cite
\r
30971 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30972 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
\r
30978 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30986 pagestyle{headings}
\r
30992 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30996 switches back to page style with the default headings
\r
31004 \begin_layout Section
\r
31005 Previewing Snippets of your Document
\r
31006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
31007 LatexCommand label
\r
31008 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
31013 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31023 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31027 Document ! Preview
\r
31035 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31036 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
\r
31037 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
\r
31038 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
\r
31041 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31045 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31046 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
\r
31051 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31055 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
\r
31060 (on some systems named simply
\r
31065 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
\r
31067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
31068 LatexCommand cite
\r
31069 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
31073 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
31074 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
\r
31075 \family typewriter
\r
31079 \family typewriter
\r
31082 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
\r
31083 automatically installed together with LyX.
\r
31086 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31087 Enabling previews
\r
31090 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31091 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
\r
31092 LaTeX, activate the option
\r
31095 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31102 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31108 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31112 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31115 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31122 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31135 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31140 is the multiplication factor for the size.
\r
31143 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31144 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
\r
31148 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31156 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31165 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
\r
31166 editing an inset.
\r
31169 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31170 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
31173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31178 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
\r
31179 generated by activating the option
\r
31182 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31188 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
\r
31196 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31197 Selected document parts
\r
31200 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31201 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
\r
31202 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
\r
31203 that are not yet supported by LyX.
\r
31204 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
\r
31206 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31210 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
\r
31211 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
\r
31212 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
\r
31215 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31216 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
\r
31222 which is not yet supported by LyX.
\r
31223 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31233 is explained in section
\r
31235 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
\r
31240 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31250 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
\r
31251 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
\r
31253 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
\r
31255 Here is the result:
\r
31258 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31259 \begin_inset Preview
\r
31261 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31270 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
\r
31276 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
\r
31286 height_special "totalheight"
\r
31289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31314 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
\r
31320 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
\r
31327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31342 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31343 Previewing works also for colors.
\r
31344 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
\r
31352 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31362 is explained in section
\r
31369 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31382 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31383 \begin_inset Preview
\r
31385 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31408 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
\r
31413 This is text within a colored, framed box.
\r
31417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31432 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31433 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
31439 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31440 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
\r
31441 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
\r
31442 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
\r
31444 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
\r
31445 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
\r
31446 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
\r
31447 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
\r
31451 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31452 LaTeX source code
\r
31455 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31456 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
\r
31459 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31461 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31466 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
\r
31467 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
\r
31469 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
\r
31470 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
\r
31471 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
\r
31472 the source view window.
\r
31477 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
\r
31478 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
\r
31479 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
\r
31482 \begin_layout Section
\r
31483 Advanced Find and Replace
\r
31484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
31485 LatexCommand label
\r
31486 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
31491 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31501 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31513 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31517 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31518 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
\r
31519 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
\r
31520 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
\r
31521 The key-features are:
\r
31524 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31525 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
\r
31526 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
\r
31527 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
\r
31531 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31532 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
\r
31533 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
\r
31534 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
\r
31535 a section heading will only be found within section headings
\r
31538 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31539 Search may be widened to a specific
\r
31544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31548 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31551 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
\r
31552 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
\r
31559 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31560 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
\r
31561 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
\r
31562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31566 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31569 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
\r
31572 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31576 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31577 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
\r
31579 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31590 \begin_inset Info
\r
31592 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
\r
31595 ) or the toolbar button
\r
31596 \begin_inset Info
\r
31598 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
\r
31604 Advanced Find and Replace
\r
31609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31610 Searching for text
\r
31613 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31618 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
\r
31622 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31627 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
\r
31628 \begin_inset Info
\r
31630 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31634 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
\r
31635 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
\r
31637 \begin_inset Info
\r
31639 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31642 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
\r
31646 searches backwards.
\r
31649 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31653 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31658 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
\r
31667 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31672 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
\r
31675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31676 Searching for mathematics
\r
31679 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31680 Mathematical formulas, such as
\r
31681 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
\r
31684 or something more complex like
\r
31685 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
\r
31688 , may be searched for by typing them in the
\r
31693 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
\r
31694 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
\r
31695 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
\r
31696 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
\r
31702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31703 Style-aware search
\r
31706 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31707 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
\r
31708 This is done by switching to the
\r
31712 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
\r
31717 This way, entering in the
\r
31724 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31725 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
\r
31726 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
\r
31729 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31730 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
\r
31731 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
\r
31734 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31735 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
\r
31736 of it only within section headings.
\r
31737 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
\r
31738 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
\r
31742 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31743 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
\r
31744 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
\r
31747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31751 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31752 The entries made in the
\r
31756 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
\r
31759 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31765 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
\r
31769 button or alternatively press
\r
31770 \begin_inset Info
\r
31772 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31779 while the cursor is in the
\r
31782 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31790 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31791 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
\r
31792 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
\r
31796 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31797 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
\r
31798 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
\r
31799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31806 with its typewriter version
\r
31807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31811 \family typewriter
\r
31815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31821 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31822 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
\r
31824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31828 \begin_inset Formula $R$
\r
31832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31840 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
\r
31844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31847 (you may want to enable the
\r
31850 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31858 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31863 options and disable the
\r
31871 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
\r
31872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31879 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
\r
31880 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
\r
31884 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
\r
31887 , or occurrences of
\r
31888 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
\r
31892 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
\r
31898 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31902 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31903 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
\r
31904 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31908 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
\r
31910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
31911 LatexCommand href
\r
31912 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
\r
31921 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
\r
31927 This is done with the context menu
\r
31929 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31930 Insert Regular Expression
\r
31932 while the cursor is in the
\r
31937 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
\r
31938 expression matching rules
\r
31939 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31943 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
\r
31945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31949 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31952 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
\r
31953 to match expressions.
\r
31958 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
\r
31959 same text in the document.
\r
31960 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
\r
31961 Examples of using such a feature may be:
\r
31964 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
31965 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
\r
31970 editor the fraction
\r
31971 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
\r
31975 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
31978 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
\r
31979 fractions with the given denominator.
\r
31982 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
31983 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
\r
31995 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
32000 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
\r
32001 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
\r
32002 Also, by inserting a
\r
32003 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
32006 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
\r
32007 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
\r
32010 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32011 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
\r
32012 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
\r
32013 \begin_inset Formula $()$
\r
32016 , and referring back to them through
\r
32017 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
\r
32021 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
\r
32025 For example, try searching with the regexp
\r
32026 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32029 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
\r
32032 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32035 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
\r
32038 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32039 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
\r
32042 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32043 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
32046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32051 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
\r
32052 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
\r
32053 sub-expressions is absolute.
\r
32055 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32059 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
\r
32062 always refers to the first occurrence of
\r
32063 \begin_inset Formula $()$
\r
32066 in all entered regexps.
\r
32074 \begin_layout Section
\r
32076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32077 LatexCommand label
\r
32078 name "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
32083 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32095 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32096 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
\r
32099 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32106 key or the toolbar button
\r
32107 \begin_inset Info
\r
32109 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
\r
32112 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
\r
32113 beginning of the currently selected text.
\r
32114 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
\r
32115 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
\r
32116 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
\r
32117 scrolled so that it is visible.
\r
32118 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
\r
32119 n, if any could be found.
\r
32120 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
\r
32124 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
\r
32125 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
\r
32128 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32129 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
\r
32130 that is set in the
\r
32132 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32136 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
\r
32137 a different one at the top of the dialog.
\r
32138 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
\r
32139 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
\r
32142 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32148 \begin_inset Info
\r
32150 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
32153 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
\r
32154 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
\r
32157 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32158 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
\r
32159 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32163 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
32166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32168 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
\r
32174 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32178 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32181 files for each language.
\r
32182 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
\r
32183 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32186 files into LyX's installation subfolder
\r
32197 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32201 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32204 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32205 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32207 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32210 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32213 you can set the following things:
\r
32216 \begin_layout Description
\r
32218 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32221 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
\r
32222 Depending on your platform,
\r
32223 \family typewriter
\r
32227 \family typewriter
\r
32231 \family typewriter
\r
32233 \begin_inset Foot
\r
32236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32237 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
\r
32238 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
\r
32247 \family typewriter
\r
32253 \begin_layout Description
\r
32255 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32258 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
\r
32259 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
\r
32262 \begin_layout Description
\r
32264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32267 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
\r
32268 should escape, e.
\r
32269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32273 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32277 This should normally not be needed.
\r
32280 \begin_layout Description
\r
32282 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32286 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32289 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
\r
32291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
32295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
32301 \begin_layout Description
\r
32303 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32306 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
\r
32307 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
\r
32308 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
\r
32309 appear in a context menu.
\r
32310 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
\r
32314 \begin_layout Description
\r
32316 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32320 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32324 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32327 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
\r
32331 \begin_layout Section
\r
32333 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32344 LatexCommand label
\r
32345 name "sec:Thesaurus"
\r
32352 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32353 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
\r
32354 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
\r
32356 \family typewriter
\r
32360 \begin_inset Foot
\r
32363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32364 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
32365 LatexCommand href
\r
32366 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
\r
32375 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
\r
32376 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
\r
32377 are available for many languages.
\r
32380 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32381 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
\r
32382 the use with LyX.
\r
32385 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32386 Setting up the thesaurus
\r
32389 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32391 \family typewriter
\r
32397 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
\r
32402 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
\r
32407 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
\r
32409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32413 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32421 For instance, the US English files are named:
\r
32424 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
32428 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
32432 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32433 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux
\r
32434 system, these files should be already on your system.
\r
32435 On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be
\r
32439 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32440 All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
\r
32441 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32445 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
32448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32450 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
\r
32456 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32459 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
\r
32460 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32463 files into LyX's installation subfolder
\r
32474 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32475 Using the thesaurus
\r
32478 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32479 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
\r
32481 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32484 or the toolbar button
\r
32485 \begin_inset Info
\r
32487 arg "thesaurus-entry"
\r
32490 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
\r
32492 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
\r
32494 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
\r
32495 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
\r
32496 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
\r
32505 ), related terms (such as
\r
32508 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32517 ), compounds (such as
\r
32520 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32525 , if you look for
\r
32529 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
\r
32538 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
\r
32541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32542 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
\r
32543 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
\r
32544 up directly there.
\r
32547 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32548 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
\r
32549 the dictionary, such as the above
\r
32553 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
\r
32554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32558 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32561 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
\r
32562 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
\r
32563 For example, looking up the word form
\r
32567 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
\r
32572 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
\r
32573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32577 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32588 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
\r
32589 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
\r
32590 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
\r
32593 \begin_layout Section
\r
32595 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32605 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32609 Document ! Change Tracking
\r
32615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32616 LatexCommand label
\r
32617 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
32624 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32625 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
\r
32626 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
\r
32627 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
\r
32628 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
\r
32630 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32632 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32635 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32637 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32645 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32646 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
\r
32657 \strikeout default
\r
32660 The color depends on the author that made the change.
\r
32661 You can change the color in
\r
32663 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32664 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32666 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32670 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32675 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32681 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32685 Color ! Change tracking
\r
32690 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
\r
32691 the cursor is in changed text.
\r
32692 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
\r
32693 \begin_inset Info
\r
32695 arg "changes-merge"
\r
32701 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32702 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
\r
32703 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32715 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32716 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32722 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32723 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
32724 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
\r
32732 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32733 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32739 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32740 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
\r
32743 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32744 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32750 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32751 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
32752 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
\r
32753 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
32754 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
32755 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
32756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32758 \begin_inset Text
\r
32760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32763 \begin_inset Info
\r
32765 arg "changes-track"
\r
32773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32774 \begin_inset Text
\r
32776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32779 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32781 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32784 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32786 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32797 \begin_inset Text
\r
32799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32802 \begin_inset Info
\r
32804 arg "changes-output"
\r
32812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32813 \begin_inset Text
\r
32815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32818 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32820 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32823 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32825 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32829 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32833 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32844 \begin_inset Text
\r
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32849 \begin_inset Info
\r
32851 arg "change-next"
\r
32859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32860 \begin_inset Text
\r
32862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32863 Jumps to the next change
\r
32869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32871 \begin_inset Text
\r
32873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32876 \begin_inset Info
\r
32878 arg "change-accept"
\r
32886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32887 \begin_inset Text
\r
32889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32892 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32894 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32897 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32899 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32910 \begin_inset Text
\r
32912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32915 \begin_inset Info
\r
32917 arg "change-reject"
\r
32925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32926 \begin_inset Text
\r
32928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32931 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32933 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32936 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32938 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32949 \begin_inset Text
\r
32951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32954 \begin_inset Info
\r
32956 arg "changes-merge"
\r
32964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32965 \begin_inset Text
\r
32967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32970 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32972 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32975 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32977 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32988 \begin_inset Text
\r
32990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32993 \begin_inset Info
\r
32995 arg "all-changes-accept"
\r
33003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33004 \begin_inset Text
\r
33006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33009 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33011 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33014 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33016 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33020 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33031 \begin_inset Text
\r
33033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33036 \begin_inset Info
\r
33038 arg "all-changes-reject"
\r
33046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33047 \begin_inset Text
\r
33049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33052 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33054 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33057 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33059 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33063 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33074 \begin_inset Text
\r
33076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33079 \begin_inset Info
\r
33081 arg "note-insert"
\r
33089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33090 \begin_inset Text
\r
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33095 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33096 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33109 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33120 \begin_inset Text
\r
33122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33125 \begin_inset Info
\r
33135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33136 \begin_inset Text
\r
33138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33141 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33143 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33159 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33160 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
33166 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33167 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
\r
33187 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33188 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
\r
33189 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
\r
33190 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
\r
33191 the next change after the current cursor position.
\r
33192 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
\r
33193 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
\r
33194 step to the next change.
\r
33195 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
\r
33198 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33199 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
\r
33200 to describe a change.
\r
33203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33204 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
\r
33209 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33213 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
\r
33219 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
\r
33220 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
33221 LatexCommand cite
\r
33222 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
33226 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
33229 \begin_layout Section
\r
33230 Comparison of Documents
\r
33231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33232 LatexCommand label
\r
33233 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
\r
33238 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33242 Comparison of documents
\r
33250 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33251 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
\r
33253 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33257 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
\r
33259 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
\r
33260 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
\r
33264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33268 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33272 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33281 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33285 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33289 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33293 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33297 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33301 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33306 enables the change tracking option
\r
33309 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33313 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33317 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33322 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
\r
33325 \begin_layout Section
\r
33326 International Support
\r
33327 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33331 International support
\r
33339 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33340 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
\r
33341 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
\r
33342 up LyX to use them:
\r
33343 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
33344 LatexCommand cite
\r
33345 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
\r
33352 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33353 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
\r
33354 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33360 reference "sub:Special-Character"
\r
33367 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33369 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33373 Language ! Options
\r
33379 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33383 Document ! Settings
\r
33389 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33393 Document ! Language
\r
33401 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33404 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33405 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33408 dialog lets you set
\r
33410 the language, the quote style and character encoding
\r
33415 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33420 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
\r
33424 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33429 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
\r
33430 For details about the different encoding options see section
\r
33431 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33437 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
33444 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33445 Keyboard mapping configuration
\r
33446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33447 LatexCommand label
\r
33448 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
\r
33455 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33456 If you have for example a U.
\r
33457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
33460 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
\r
33461 can use an alternate keymap.
\r
33462 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
\r
33463 use an Italian keymap.
\r
33466 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33467 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33468 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33471 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
\r
33472 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33478 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
\r
33483 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
\r
33484 which one you want to use.
\r
33487 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33488 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
\r
33489 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
\r
33490 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
\r
33491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
33494 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
\r
33495 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
\r
33496 one to support the characters you want.
\r
33497 This and many other customizations are explained in the
\r
33504 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
33505 \start_of_appendix
\r
33506 The User Interface
\r
33507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33508 LatexCommand label
\r
33509 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
\r
33516 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33517 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
\r
33518 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
\r
33519 topic inside the user's guide.
\r
33522 \begin_layout Section
\r
33524 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33536 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33541 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
\r
33544 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33548 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33549 Creates a new document.
\r
33552 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33553 New from Template
\r
33556 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33557 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
\r
33558 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
\r
33559 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
\r
33562 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33566 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33567 Opens a document.
\r
33570 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33574 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33575 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
\r
33576 Click there on a file to open it.
\r
33579 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33583 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33584 Closes the current document.
\r
33587 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33591 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33592 Closes all opened documents.
\r
33595 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33599 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33600 Saves the actual document.
\r
33603 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33607 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33608 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
\r
33611 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33615 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33616 Saves all opened documents.
\r
33619 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33623 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33624 Reloads the actual document from disk.
\r
33627 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33631 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33632 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
\r
33633 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
\r
33634 It is described in the section
\r
33636 Version Control in LyX
\r
33640 Additional Features
\r
33645 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33649 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33650 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
\r
33651 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
\r
33653 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
\r
33656 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33657 When using the menu entry
\r
33660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33665 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
\r
33669 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33673 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33677 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33682 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
\r
33683 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
\r
33686 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33689 LatexCommand label
\r
33690 name "sub:Export"
\r
33697 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33698 You can export your document to various file formats.
\r
33699 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
\r
33700 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
\r
33701 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
\r
33704 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33705 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
\r
33707 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33713 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
33720 \begin_layout Description
\r
33726 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33740 yX format of the special LyX
\r
33741 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33744 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
\r
33745 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
33748 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
\r
33751 \begin_layout Description
\r
33752 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
\r
33754 \family typewriter
\r
33758 \begin_layout Description
\r
33760 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33763 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
\r
33765 \family typewriter
\r
33769 \begin_layout Description
\r
33770 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
\r
33771 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
\r
33772 files paths or file names in your document.
\r
33773 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
\r
33780 \begin_layout Description
\r
33781 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
\r
33782 in files paths or file names
\r
33785 \begin_layout Description
\r
33787 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33801 eX) DVI-format using the program
\r
33802 \family typewriter
\r
33805 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
\r
33808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
33811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33816 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
\r
33824 \begin_layout Description
\r
33826 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33829 Dot text file with code in the programming language
\r
33830 \family typewriter
\r
33833 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
\r
33834 \family typewriter
\r
33838 \begin_layout Description
\r
33839 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
\r
33840 work in all cases)
\r
33843 \begin_layout Description
\r
33845 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33849 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33852 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
\r
33856 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
\r
33857 not in the format
\r
33864 \begin_layout Description
\r
33871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33879 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33903 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
\r
33904 \family typewriter
\r
33908 \begin_layout Description
\r
33915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33923 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33928 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
\r
33929 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
\r
33930 \family typewriter
\r
33933 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
\r
33936 \begin_layout Description
\r
33943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33951 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33956 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
\r
33957 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
\r
33959 \family typewriter
\r
33965 \begin_layout Description
\r
33972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33980 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34004 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
\r
34005 \family typewriter
\r
34009 \begin_layout Description
\r
34011 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34015 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34033 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
\r
34034 music notation software
\r
34035 \family typewriter
\r
34039 \begin_layout Description
\r
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34056 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34060 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34063 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
\r
34064 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
\r
34065 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
\r
34068 \begin_layout Description
\r
34075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34085 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34088 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
\r
34089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34104 represent the version number)
\r
34107 \begin_layout Description
\r
34114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34123 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
\r
34126 \begin_layout Description
\r
34127 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
\r
34128 \family typewriter
\r
34132 \begin_layout Description
\r
34133 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
\r
34135 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
\r
34138 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
\r
34142 \begin_layout Description
\r
34146 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34151 PDF-format using the program
\r
34152 \family typewriter
\r
34155 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
\r
34158 \begin_layout Description
\r
34162 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34178 PDF-format using the program
\r
34179 \family typewriter
\r
34182 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34185 \begin_layout Description
\r
34189 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34194 PDF-format using the program
\r
34195 \family typewriter
\r
34198 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34201 \begin_layout Description
\r
34205 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34210 PDF-format using the program
\r
34211 \family typewriter
\r
34214 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
\r
34217 \begin_layout Description
\r
34221 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34237 PDF-format using the program
\r
34238 \family typewriter
\r
34241 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34244 \begin_layout Description
\r
34248 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34256 \begin_layout Description
\r
34260 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34269 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
\r
34270 and then exported as text using the program
\r
34275 \begin_layout Description
\r
34280 PostScript format using the program
\r
34281 \family typewriter
\r
34285 \begin_layout Description
\r
34286 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
\r
34287 programming language
\r
34288 \family typewriter
\r
34293 \family typewriter
\r
34297 \family typewriter
\r
34300 it is possible to use
\r
34301 \family typewriter
\r
34304 -commands in LaTeX
\r
34307 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34308 If one of the menu entries
\r
34315 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34324 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
\r
34325 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
\r
34326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34332 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
34337 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34341 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
34349 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34354 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
\r
34355 format or send it to a printer.
\r
34356 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
\r
34357 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
\r
34359 \family typewriter
\r
34363 For more information have a look at section
\r
34364 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34370 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
\r
34377 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34381 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34382 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
\r
34383 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
\r
34384 prefix, see section
\r
34385 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34391 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
34396 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
\r
34397 \family typewriter
\r
34401 \family typewriter
\r
34405 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
\r
34406 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
\r
34407 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34413 reference "sub:Converters"
\r
34420 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34421 New and Close Window
\r
34424 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34425 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
\r
34428 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34432 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34433 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
\r
34436 \begin_layout Section
\r
34438 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34450 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34454 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34455 Described in section
\r
34456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34462 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
\r
34469 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34470 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
\r
34473 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34474 Described in section
\r
34475 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34481 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
34488 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34489 Select Whole Inset
\r
34492 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34493 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
\r
34494 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
\r
34497 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34501 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34502 Selects the whole document.
\r
34505 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34506 Find & Replace (Quick)
\r
34509 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34510 Described in section
\r
34511 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34517 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
34524 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34525 Find & Replace (Advanced)
\r
34528 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34529 Described in section
\r
34530 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34536 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
34543 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34544 Move Paragraph Up/Down
\r
34547 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34548 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
\r
34552 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34556 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34557 Described in section
\r
34558 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34564 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
34571 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34572 Paragraph Settings
\r
34573 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34577 Paragraph ! Settings
\r
34585 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34586 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
\r
34587 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
\r
34591 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34592 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
\r
34593 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
\r
34599 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34600 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34602 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34610 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34614 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34615 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
\r
34616 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
\r
34617 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
\r
34621 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34622 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
\r
34624 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
\r
34625 The properties of tables are described in section
\r
34626 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34632 reference "sec:Tables"
\r
34636 , the properties of formulas in chapter
\r
34637 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34643 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
34650 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34651 Increase/Decrease List Depth
\r
34654 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34655 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
\r
34657 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
\r
34658 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34664 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
34669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34671 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
34678 \begin_layout Section
\r
34680 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34692 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34693 At the bottom of the
\r
34697 menu the opened documents are listed.
\r
34700 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34701 Open/Close all Insets
\r
34704 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34705 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
\r
34708 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34709 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
\r
34712 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34713 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
\r
34716 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34717 Math macros are described in the
\r
34724 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34728 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34729 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
\r
34731 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34737 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
34744 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34748 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34749 Opens a window showing console messages.
\r
34750 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
\r
34751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34754 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
\r
34755 while LaTeX is processing the document.
\r
34758 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34760 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34763 [<output format>]
\r
34766 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34767 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
\r
34768 default output format for the document (menu
\r
34770 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34771 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34772 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34774 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34778 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34784 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34790 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
34794 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
\r
34796 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34797 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34799 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34802 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34804 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34807 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34809 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34813 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34819 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34825 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34829 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
\r
34830 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
\r
34832 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34833 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34835 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34838 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34840 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34843 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34847 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34853 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34858 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
\r
34859 The default output format is
\r
34862 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34870 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34871 View (Other Formats)
\r
34874 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34875 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
\r
34876 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
\r
34877 actual document with an external program.
\r
34878 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
\r
34879 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
\r
34880 All possible formats are listed in section
\r
34881 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34887 reference "sub:Export"
\r
34892 You should at least see the menu entry
\r
34897 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
\r
34898 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
\r
34899 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34905 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
34910 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34914 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
34922 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34923 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
\r
34924 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
\r
34926 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34927 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34929 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34932 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34934 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34937 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34941 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34947 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34952 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
\r
34955 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34957 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34960 [<output format>]
\r
34963 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34964 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
\r
34965 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
\r
34968 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34969 Update (Other Formats)
\r
34972 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34973 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
\r
34974 your document without opening a new viewer window.
\r
34977 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34978 View Master Document
\r
34981 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34982 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
\r
34983 which is then its
\r
34984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35003 manual for more information on this topic).
\r
35004 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
\r
35005 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
\r
35009 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35013 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35018 generates the output of the whole book, while
\r
35022 will just output the chapter alone.
\r
35025 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35026 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
\r
35027 in the document settings (menu
\r
35029 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35030 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35031 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35033 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35043 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35049 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
35053 ) or in the preferences (menu
\r
35055 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35056 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35058 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35061 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35063 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35066 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35072 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35078 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35084 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
35091 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35092 Update Master Document
\r
35095 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35096 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
\r
35097 which is then its
\r
35098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
35102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
35112 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35117 manual for more information on this topic).
\r
35118 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
\r
35119 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
\r
35122 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35123 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
\r
35124 in the document settings (menu
\r
35126 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35127 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35128 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35130 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35134 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35140 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35146 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
35150 ) or in the preferences (menu
\r
35152 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35153 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35155 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35158 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35160 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35163 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35165 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35169 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35175 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35181 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
35188 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35192 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35196 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35200 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35204 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35208 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35212 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35216 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35221 will split LyX's main window vertically while
\r
35224 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35228 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35232 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35236 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35240 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35244 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35249 will split it horizontally.
\r
35250 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
\r
35251 to view the same document, but at different positions.
\r
35252 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
\r
35253 three or more documents at the same time.
\r
35254 To close a split view, use the menu
\r
35257 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35261 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35269 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35270 Close Current View
\r
35273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35274 Closes a split view.
\r
35277 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35281 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35282 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
\r
35283 so that you will see nothing but your text.
\r
35284 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
\r
35285 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
\r
35286 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
\r
35289 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
35292 LatexCommand label
\r
35293 name "sub:Toolbars"
\r
35298 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35311 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
\r
35312 All toolbars and the
\r
35315 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35320 can be turned on and off.
\r
35325 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
\r
35337 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35349 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35354 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
\r
35358 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
\r
35365 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35370 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
\r
35374 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
\r
35375 or when a certain feature is enabled.
\r
35376 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
\r
35377 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
\r
35378 is inside a formula or table respectively.
\r
35381 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35382 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
\r
35383 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35389 reference "sec:Toolbars"
\r
35396 \begin_layout Section
\r
35398 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35410 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35414 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35415 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
\r
35416 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35422 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
35433 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35434 Special Character
\r
35435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
35436 LatexCommand label
\r
35437 name "sub:Special-Character"
\r
35444 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35445 Here you can insert the following characters:
\r
35448 \begin_layout Description
\r
35449 Symbols Opens the
\r
35453 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
\r
35455 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
\r
35456 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
\r
35457 You can get a complete display by checking
\r
35460 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35466 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35470 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
35473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35478 Not all characters will be visible in the
\r
35482 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
\r
35484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
35488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35490 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
35494 ) can display every character.
\r
35502 \begin_layout Description
\r
35503 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
35507 \begin_layout Description
\r
35509 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35513 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35516 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
\r
35517 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35523 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
35530 \begin_layout Description
\r
35532 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35535 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
\r
35538 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35539 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35545 \begin_layout Description
\r
35547 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35550 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
\r
35553 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35554 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35560 \begin_layout Description
\r
35562 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35565 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
\r
35569 \begin_layout Description
\r
35571 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35574 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
35578 \begin_layout Description
\r
35580 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35583 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35587 \begin_layout Description
\r
35589 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35593 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35603 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35607 Language ! Phonetic symbols
\r
35612 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
\r
35613 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
\r
35615 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
\r
35620 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35624 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
\r
35630 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35633 More information about this feature can be found in the
\r
35639 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35645 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35649 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35650 Opens a submenu with the following options:
\r
35653 \begin_layout Description
\r
35654 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
\r
35655 \begin_inset script superscript
\r
35657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35666 \begin_layout Description
\r
35667 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
\r
35668 \begin_inset script subscript
\r
35670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35679 \begin_layout Description
\r
35681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35684 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
\r
35685 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35691 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
35698 \begin_layout Description
\r
35700 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35703 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
\r
35704 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35710 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
35717 \begin_layout Description
\r
35719 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35722 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
\r
35723 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35729 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
35736 \begin_layout Description
\r
35738 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35741 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
\r
35742 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35748 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
35755 \begin_layout Description
\r
35757 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35760 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
\r
35761 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35767 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
\r
35774 \begin_layout Description
\r
35776 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35779 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
\r
35780 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35786 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
\r
35793 \begin_layout Description
\r
35794 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
\r
35795 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35801 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
35808 \begin_layout Description
\r
35810 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35813 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
\r
35814 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35820 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
\r
35827 \begin_layout Description
\r
35829 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35832 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
\r
35833 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35839 reference "sub:Ligatures"
\r
35846 \begin_layout Description
\r
35848 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35852 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35855 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
\r
35856 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35862 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
35869 \begin_layout Description
\r
35871 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35874 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
\r
35875 as described in section
\r
35876 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35882 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
35889 \begin_layout Description
\r
35891 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35894 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
\r
35895 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35901 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
35908 \begin_layout Description
\r
35910 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35913 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
\r
35914 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
\r
35916 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35922 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
35929 \begin_layout Description
\r
35931 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35934 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
\r
35935 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35941 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
35948 \begin_layout Description
\r
35950 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35954 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35957 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
\r
35958 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35964 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
35971 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35975 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35976 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
\r
35980 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35987 List of Algorithms
\r
35997 are described in section
\r
35998 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36004 reference "sec:toc"
\r
36013 is described in section
\r
36014 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36020 reference "sec:Index"
\r
36028 is described in section
\r
36029 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36035 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
36041 BibTeX Bibliography
\r
36043 is described in section
\r
36044 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36050 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
36057 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36061 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36062 To insert floats, as described in section
\r
36063 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36069 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
36073 and in detail the chapter
\r
36080 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36088 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36092 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36093 To insert notes, described in section
\r
36094 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36100 reference "sec:Notes"
\r
36107 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36111 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36112 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
\r
36114 Branches are described in section
\r
36115 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36121 reference "sec:Branches"
\r
36128 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36132 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36133 Inserts document class-specific insets.
\r
36134 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
\r
36136 An example is the document class
\r
36137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
36140 article (Elsevier)
\r
36141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
36144 with three custom insets.
\r
36147 Flex insets and InsetLayout
\r
36151 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
\r
36157 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
\r
36160 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36162 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36166 External Material
\r
36174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36175 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
\r
36176 in your document.
\r
36177 For more information see chapter
\r
36179 External Document Parts
\r
36182 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36188 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36190 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36202 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36203 Inserts a box in a certain style.
\r
36204 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
\r
36211 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36219 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36223 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36228 dialog as described in section
\r
36229 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36235 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
36242 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36246 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36251 as described in section
\r
36252 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36258 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
36265 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36269 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36274 as described in section
\r
36275 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36281 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
36288 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36290 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36300 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36304 Longtables ! Caption
\r
36312 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36313 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
\r
36314 Floats are described in section
\r
36315 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36321 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
36325 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
\r
36327 Longtable Captions
\r
36332 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36340 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36344 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36345 Inserts an index entry as described in section
\r
36346 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36352 reference "sec:Index"
\r
36359 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36360 Nomenclature Entry
\r
36363 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36364 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
\r
36365 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36371 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
36378 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36382 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36383 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
\r
36384 Tables are described in section
\r
36385 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36391 reference "sec:Tables"
\r
36395 and in detail in the chapter
\r
36402 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36410 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36414 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36420 Graphics are described in section
\r
36421 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36427 reference "sec:Graphics"
\r
36434 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36438 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36439 Inserts a URL as described in section
\r
36440 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36446 reference "sub:URLs"
\r
36453 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36457 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36458 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
\r
36459 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36465 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
\r
36472 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36476 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36477 Inserts a footnote as described in section
\r
36478 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36484 reference "sec:Footnotes"
\r
36491 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36495 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36496 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
\r
36497 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36503 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
\r
36510 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36514 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36515 Inserts a short title as described in section
\r
36516 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36522 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
36529 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36533 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36534 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
\r
36535 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36541 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
\r
36548 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36550 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36562 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36563 Inserts a program listings box.
\r
36564 Program listings are explained in the chapter
\r
36566 Program Code Listings
\r
36571 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36579 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36583 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36584 Inserts the actual date.
\r
36585 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
\r
36587 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
\r
36590 External Material
\r
36595 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36603 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36607 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36608 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
\r
36609 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36615 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
36622 \begin_layout Section
\r
36623 The Navigate Menu
\r
36624 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36636 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36637 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
\r
36638 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36641 of the current document.
\r
36642 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
\r
36645 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36649 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36650 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
\r
36651 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
\r
36652 to jump, for example, between section
\r
36653 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36657 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
\r
36658 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36661 2.5 and use the submenu
\r
36664 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36668 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36674 Then go to section
\r
36675 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36685 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36691 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
\r
36692 the key bindings
\r
36693 \begin_inset Info
\r
36695 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
\r
36699 \begin_inset Info
\r
36701 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
\r
36704 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
\r
36707 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36708 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
\r
36712 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36717 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
\r
36720 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36725 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
\r
36728 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36729 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
\r
36732 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36733 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
\r
36737 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36741 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36742 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
\r
36743 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
\r
36744 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
\r
36748 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36752 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36760 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36764 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36765 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
\r
36769 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36777 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36782 manual for a detailed description.
\r
36785 \begin_layout Section
\r
36786 The Document Menu
\r
36787 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36799 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36803 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36804 Change Tracking is described in section
\r
36805 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36811 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
36818 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36833 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36834 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
\r
36836 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
\r
36837 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
\r
36838 to the clipboard or update the view.
\r
36839 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
\r
36842 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36846 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36847 Opens the Outline window as described in sections
\r
36848 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36854 reference "sec:Navigating"
\r
36859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36861 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
\r
36868 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36869 Start Appendix Here
\r
36872 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36873 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
\r
36874 as described in section
\r
36875 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36881 reference "sec:Appendices"
\r
36888 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36892 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36893 Un/compresses the current document.
\r
36896 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36900 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36901 The document settings are described in appendix
\r
36902 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36908 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
\r
36915 \begin_layout Section
\r
36917 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36929 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36933 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36934 Spell checking is explained in section
\r
36935 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36941 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
36948 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36952 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36953 The thesaurus is described in section
\r
36954 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36960 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
\r
36967 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36969 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36979 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36991 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36992 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
\r
36993 the highlighted document part.
\r
36996 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37009 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37021 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37022 Generates with the help of the program
\r
37023 \family typewriter
\r
37026 a log of possible LaTeX-errorsand displays it in a dialog.
\r
37027 This feature is not available on Windows.
\r
37030 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37043 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37055 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37056 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
\r
37061 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37066 to see the full filename paths.
\r
37069 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37071 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37083 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37084 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
\r
37085 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
37091 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
\r
37098 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37100 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37104 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
\r
37108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37115 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
37119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37132 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37136 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
37144 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37145 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
\r
37146 needs; see also section
\r
37147 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
37153 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
37160 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37169 dialog as described in detail in appendix
\r
37170 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
37176 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
\r
37183 \begin_layout Section
\r
37185 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37197 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37198 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
\r
37200 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
\r
37204 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37208 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37213 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
\r
37214 found by LyX (see also section
\r
37215 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
37221 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
\r
37228 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37232 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37248 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
\r
37252 \begin_layout Section
\r
37254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
37255 LatexCommand label
\r
37256 name "sec:Toolbars"
\r
37263 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37264 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
\r
37265 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
37271 reference "sub:Toolbars"
\r
37278 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37279 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
\r
37280 This is described in the
\r
37282 Additional Features
\r
37287 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37289 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37293 Toolbar ! Standard
\r
37301 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37302 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
37303 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
\r
37311 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37312 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
37318 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37319 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
37324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37336 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
37339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37340 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
\r
37345 manual for more information.
\r
37353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37354 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
37360 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37361 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
37362 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
\r
37363 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
37364 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
\r
37365 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
\r
37367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37368 \begin_inset Text
\r
37370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37371 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
37372 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
\r
37382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37383 \begin_inset Text
\r
37385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37386 pull-down box for the environments
\r
37399 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37400 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
\r
37406 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37408 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
37409 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
\r
37410 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
37411 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
37412 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
37413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37415 \begin_inset Text
\r
37417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37420 \begin_inset Info
\r
37430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37431 \begin_inset Text
\r
37433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37436 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37445 \begin_inset Text
\r
37447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37450 \begin_inset Info
\r
37460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37461 \begin_inset Text
\r
37463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37466 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37475 \begin_inset Text
\r
37477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37480 \begin_inset Info
\r
37482 arg "buffer-write"
\r
37490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37491 \begin_inset Text
\r
37493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37496 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37505 \begin_inset Text
\r
37507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37510 \begin_inset Info
\r
37512 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
37520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37521 \begin_inset Text
\r
37523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37526 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37535 \begin_inset Text
\r
37537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37540 \begin_inset Info
\r
37542 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
\r
37550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37551 \begin_inset Text
\r
37553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37556 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37565 \begin_inset Text
\r
37567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37570 \begin_inset Info
\r
37580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37581 \begin_inset Text
\r
37583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37586 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37595 \begin_inset Text
\r
37597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37600 \begin_inset Info
\r
37610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37611 \begin_inset Text
\r
37613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37616 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37625 \begin_inset Text
\r
37627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37630 \begin_inset Info
\r
37640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37641 \begin_inset Text
\r
37643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37646 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37655 \begin_inset Text
\r
37657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37660 \begin_inset Info
\r
37670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37671 \begin_inset Text
\r
37673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37676 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37685 \begin_inset Text
\r
37687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37690 \begin_inset Info
\r
37700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37701 \begin_inset Text
\r
37703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37706 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37715 \begin_inset Text
\r
37717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37720 \begin_inset Info
\r
37722 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
\r
37730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37731 \begin_inset Text
\r
37733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37736 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37757 \begin_inset Text
\r
37759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37760 \begin_inset Info
\r
37762 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
\r
37770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37771 \begin_inset Text
\r
37773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37776 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37797 \begin_inset Text
\r
37799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37802 \begin_inset Info
\r
37804 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
37812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37813 \begin_inset Text
\r
37815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37818 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37819 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37828 \begin_inset Text
\r
37830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37833 \begin_inset Info
\r
37843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37844 \begin_inset Text
\r
37846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37847 Emphasize text, function of the
\r
37849 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37851 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37854 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37865 \begin_inset Text
\r
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37870 \begin_inset Info
\r
37880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37881 \begin_inset Text
\r
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37884 Set text to noun style, function of the
\r
37886 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37888 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37891 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37902 \begin_inset Text
\r
37904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37907 \begin_inset Info
\r
37909 arg "textstyle-apply"
\r
37917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37918 \begin_inset Text
\r
37920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37921 Format text using the current settings in the
\r
37923 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37925 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37928 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37939 \begin_inset Text
\r
37941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37944 \begin_inset Info
\r
37954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37955 \begin_inset Text
\r
37957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37960 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37961 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37963 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37974 \begin_inset Text
\r
37976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37979 \begin_inset Info
\r
37981 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
37989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37990 \begin_inset Text
\r
37992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37995 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38004 \begin_inset Text
\r
38006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38007 \begin_inset Info
\r
38009 arg "tabular-insert"
\r
38017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38018 \begin_inset Text
\r
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38023 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38032 \begin_inset Text
\r
38034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38037 \begin_inset Info
\r
38039 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
\r
38047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38048 \begin_inset Text
\r
38050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38051 Toggle outline window on/off,
\r
38053 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38062 \begin_inset Text
\r
38064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38067 \begin_inset Info
\r
38069 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
\r
38077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38078 \begin_inset Text
\r
38080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38081 Toggle math toolbar on/off
\r
38087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38089 \begin_inset Text
\r
38091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38094 \begin_inset Info
\r
38096 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
\r
38104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38105 \begin_inset Text
\r
38107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38108 Toggle table toolbar on/off
\r
38121 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
38123 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38135 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38136 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
38137 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
\r
38145 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38146 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
38152 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38153 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
38157 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38158 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
38164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38165 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
38166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
\r
38167 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
38168 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
38169 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
38170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38172 \begin_inset Text
\r
38174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38177 \begin_inset Info
\r
38187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38188 \begin_inset Text
\r
38190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38199 \begin_inset Text
\r
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38204 \begin_inset Info
\r
38206 arg "layout Enumerate"
\r
38214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38215 \begin_inset Text
\r
38217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38226 \begin_inset Text
\r
38228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38231 \begin_inset Info
\r
38233 arg "layout Itemize"
\r
38241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38242 \begin_inset Text
\r
38244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38253 \begin_inset Text
\r
38255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38258 \begin_inset Info
\r
38260 arg "layout List"
\r
38268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38269 \begin_inset Text
\r
38271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38280 \begin_inset Text
\r
38282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38285 \begin_inset Info
\r
38287 arg "layout Description"
\r
38295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38296 \begin_inset Text
\r
38298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38307 \begin_inset Text
\r
38309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38312 \begin_inset Info
\r
38314 arg "depth-increment"
\r
38322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38323 \begin_inset Text
\r
38325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38328 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38330 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38334 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38345 \begin_inset Text
\r
38347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38350 \begin_inset Info
\r
38352 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
38360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38361 \begin_inset Text
\r
38363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38366 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38368 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38372 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38383 \begin_inset Text
\r
38385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38388 \begin_inset Info
\r
38390 arg "float-insert figure"
\r
38398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38399 \begin_inset Text
\r
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38404 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38405 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38414 \begin_inset Text
\r
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38419 \begin_inset Info
\r
38421 arg "float-insert table"
\r
38429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38430 \begin_inset Text
\r
38432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38435 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38436 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38445 \begin_inset Text
\r
38447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38450 \begin_inset Info
\r
38452 arg "label-insert"
\r
38460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38461 \begin_inset Text
\r
38463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38466 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38475 \begin_inset Text
\r
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38480 \begin_inset Info
\r
38482 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
38490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38491 \begin_inset Text
\r
38493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38496 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38505 \begin_inset Text
\r
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38510 \begin_inset Info
\r
38512 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
\r
38520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38521 \begin_inset Text
\r
38523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38526 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38535 \begin_inset Text
\r
38537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38540 \begin_inset Info
\r
38542 arg "index-insert"
\r
38550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38551 \begin_inset Text
\r
38553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38556 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38558 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38569 \begin_inset Text
\r
38571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38574 \begin_inset Info
\r
38576 arg "nomencl-insert"
\r
38584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38585 \begin_inset Text
\r
38587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38590 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38592 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38603 \begin_inset Text
\r
38605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38608 \begin_inset Info
\r
38610 arg "footnote-insert"
\r
38618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38619 \begin_inset Text
\r
38621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38624 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38633 \begin_inset Text
\r
38635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38638 \begin_inset Info
\r
38640 arg "marginalnote-insert"
\r
38648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38649 \begin_inset Text
\r
38651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38654 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38656 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38667 \begin_inset Text
\r
38669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38672 \begin_inset Info
\r
38674 arg "note-insert"
\r
38682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38683 \begin_inset Text
\r
38685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38688 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38689 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38702 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38713 \begin_inset Text
\r
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38718 \begin_inset Info
\r
38720 arg "box-insert Frameless"
\r
38728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38729 \begin_inset Text
\r
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38734 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38743 \begin_inset Text
\r
38745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38748 \begin_inset Info
\r
38750 arg "href-insert"
\r
38758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38759 \begin_inset Text
\r
38761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38764 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38773 \begin_inset Text
\r
38775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38778 \begin_inset Info
\r
38788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38789 \begin_inset Text
\r
38791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38794 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38811 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38822 \begin_inset Text
\r
38824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38827 \begin_inset Info
\r
38829 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
\r
38837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38838 \begin_inset Text
\r
38840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38843 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38844 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38853 \begin_inset Text
\r
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38858 \begin_inset Info
\r
38860 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
\r
38868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38869 \begin_inset Text
\r
38871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38874 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38875 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38877 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38888 \begin_inset Text
\r
38890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38893 \begin_inset Info
\r
38895 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
38903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38904 \begin_inset Text
\r
38906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38909 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38911 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38914 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38923 \begin_inset Text
\r
38925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38928 \begin_inset Info
\r
38930 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
38938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38939 \begin_inset Text
\r
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38944 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38946 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38957 \begin_inset Text
\r
38959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38962 \begin_inset Info
\r
38964 arg "thesaurus-entry"
\r
38972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38973 \begin_inset Text
\r
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38978 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38992 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
38993 View/Update Toolbar
\r
38994 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38998 Toolbar ! View / Update
\r
39006 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39007 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
39008 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
\r
39015 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39016 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
39022 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39023 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
39027 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39028 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
39034 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39035 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
39036 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
\r
39037 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
39038 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
39039 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
\r
39040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39042 \begin_inset Text
\r
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39047 \begin_inset Info
\r
39049 arg "buffer-view"
\r
39057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39058 \begin_inset Text
\r
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39063 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
39071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39072 \begin_inset Text
\r
39074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39077 \begin_inset Info
\r
39079 arg "buffer-update"
\r
39087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39088 \begin_inset Text
\r
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39093 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39100 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
39101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39102 \begin_inset Text
\r
39104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39107 \begin_inset Info
\r
39109 arg "master-buffer-view"
\r
39117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39118 \begin_inset Text
\r
39120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39123 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39125 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
39135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39136 \begin_inset Text
\r
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39141 \begin_inset Info
\r
39143 arg "master-buffer-update"
\r
39151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39152 \begin_inset Text
\r
39154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39157 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39159 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39163 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
39173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39174 \begin_inset Text
\r
39176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39179 \begin_inset Info
\r
39181 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
\r
39189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39190 \begin_inset Text
\r
39192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39195 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39196 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39197 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39198 Synchronize with Output
\r
39204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39206 \begin_inset Text
\r
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39209 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
39210 filename ../images/view-others.png
\r
39212 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
39223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39224 \begin_inset Text
\r
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39229 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39230 View (Other Formats)
\r
39236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
39237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39238 \begin_inset Text
\r
39240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39241 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
39242 filename ../images/update-others.png
\r
39244 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
39253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
39254 \begin_inset Text
\r
39256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39259 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39260 Update (Other Formats)
\r
39273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39274 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
\r
39278 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
39282 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39283 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
\r
39284 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39290 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
39294 , the table toolbar
\r
39295 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39307 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39312 manual and the math macro toolbar
\r
39313 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39329 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
39330 The Document Settings
\r
39331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
39332 LatexCommand label
\r
39333 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
\r
39338 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39342 Document ! Settings
\r
39350 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39354 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39359 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
\r
39360 is called with the menu
\r
39362 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39366 You can save your document settings as default with the
\r
39368 Save as Document Defaults
\r
39370 button in any dialog.
\r
39371 This will create a template named
\r
39372 \family typewriter
\r
39375 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
\r
39376 using a template.
\r
39379 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39382 Use Class Defaults
\r
39384 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
\r
39385 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
\r
39388 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39389 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
\r
39392 \begin_layout Section
\r
39396 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39397 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
\r
39399 Document classes are described in section
\r
39400 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39406 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
39414 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39418 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39423 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
\r
39427 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
\r
39428 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
\r
39430 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
\r
39439 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39440 Some classes use special class options by default.
\r
39441 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
\r
39445 and you can decide to use them or not.
\r
39446 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
\r
39447 recommended you leave them untouched.
\r
39452 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
\r
39457 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
\r
39458 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
\r
39460 \begin_inset Foot
\r
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39464 When you want to use one of the following drivers
\r
39465 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39470 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
\r
39473 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39476 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
\r
39482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
39483 LatexCommand href
\r
39484 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
\r
39496 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39501 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
\r
39502 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
\r
39503 document is opened without its master.
\r
39504 This way child documents are always compilable.
\r
39505 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
\r
39512 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39520 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39521 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
\r
39531 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39535 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
39541 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39545 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
39550 for cross-references, see section
\r
39551 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39557 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
39564 \begin_layout Section
\r
39568 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39569 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
\r
39570 Please refer to the section
\r
39573 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39581 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39586 manual for details.
\r
39589 \begin_layout Section
\r
39593 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39594 Modules are explained in section
\r
39595 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39601 reference "sub:Modules"
\r
39608 \begin_layout Section
\r
39612 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39614 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39620 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
\r
39624 for a description.
\r
39627 \begin_layout Section
\r
39631 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39632 The document font settings are described in section
\r
39633 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39639 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
\r
39646 \begin_layout Section
\r
39650 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39651 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
\r
39663 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39668 and whether it should be a
\r
39671 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39676 can also be specified here.
\r
39679 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39680 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
\r
39682 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
\r
39684 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
\r
39687 \begin_layout Section
\r
39691 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39692 This dialog is described in sections
\r
39693 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39699 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
\r
39704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39706 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
\r
39713 \begin_layout Section
\r
39717 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39718 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
\r
39719 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39725 reference "sub:Margins"
\r
39732 \begin_layout Section
\r
39734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
39735 LatexCommand label
\r
39736 name "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
39741 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39745 Language ! Encoding
\r
39753 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39754 The document language and quote styles are set here.
\r
39755 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
\r
39756 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
\r
39757 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
\r
39758 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
\r
39759 known for a particular character).
\r
39760 \begin_inset Foot
\r
39763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39764 The known commands are defined in a text file (
\r
39769 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
\r
39774 manual for details.
\r
39782 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39783 If you use the option
\r
39787 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
\r
39788 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
\r
39789 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
\r
39790 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
\r
39791 exactly one encoding.
\r
39792 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
\r
39795 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39796 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
\r
39797 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
\r
39798 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
\r
39799 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
\r
39800 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
\r
39801 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
\r
39806 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
\r
39807 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
\r
39808 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
\r
39809 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
\r
39810 engines to standard LaTeX.
\r
39811 Both engines support Unicode natively.
\r
39812 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
\r
39815 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39834 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39853 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39859 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39865 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
39870 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
\r
39874 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
\r
39877 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39881 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39886 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
\r
39888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
39892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
39896 The possible settings are:
\r
39899 \begin_layout Description
\r
39900 Default uses the language package that is selected in
\r
39902 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39903 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39904 Language Settings
\r
39907 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39913 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
39920 \begin_layout Description
\r
39921 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
\r
39922 format you will use.
\r
39923 In many cases this will be
\r
39928 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39932 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
39938 If the newer package
\r
39943 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39947 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
\r
39952 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
\r
39953 this package will be used instead of
\r
39960 \begin_layout Description
\r
39962 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39973 would be more appropriate.
\r
39976 \begin_layout Description
\r
39977 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
\r
39978 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
\r
39982 (for German texts), type in
\r
39985 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39990 usepackage{ngerman}
\r
39993 \begin_layout Description
\r
39994 None will not use a language package.
\r
39995 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
\r
39998 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39999 Here is a list with the important encodings:
\r
40002 \begin_layout Description
\r
40004 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40008 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40012 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40015 inputenc) Same as
\r
40019 , but the LaTeX-package
\r
40024 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40028 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
\r
40034 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
\r
40035 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
\r
40036 languages in TeX code.
\r
40039 \begin_layout Description
\r
40040 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
\r
40041 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
\r
40042 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
\r
40045 \begin_layout Description
\r
40047 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40051 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40054 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
\r
40057 \begin_layout Description
\r
40059 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40063 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40066 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
\r
40069 \begin_layout Description
\r
40071 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40074 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
\r
40077 \begin_layout Description
\r
40079 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40083 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40086 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
\r
40087 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
\r
40090 \begin_layout Description
\r
40092 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40096 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40099 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
\r
40103 \begin_layout Description
\r
40105 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40109 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40112 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
\r
40113 ISO-8859-13 encoding
\r
40116 \begin_layout Description
\r
40118 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40122 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40126 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40129 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
\r
40130 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40136 \begin_layout Description
\r
40138 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40142 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40146 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40149 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
\r
40150 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
\r
40153 \begin_layout Description
\r
40155 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40159 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40162 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
\r
40163 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
\r
40164 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
\r
40165 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40169 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40175 \begin_layout Description
\r
40177 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40181 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40184 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
\r
40185 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
\r
40186 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
\r
40187 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
\r
40188 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40192 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40198 \begin_layout Description
\r
40200 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40204 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40207 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
\r
40210 \begin_layout Description
\r
40212 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40216 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40219 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
\r
40222 \begin_layout Description
\r
40224 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40228 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40231 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
\r
40234 \begin_layout Description
\r
40236 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40239 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
\r
40242 \begin_layout Description
\r
40244 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40247 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
\r
40250 \begin_layout Description
\r
40252 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40256 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40259 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
\r
40262 \begin_layout Description
\r
40264 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40268 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40271 8859-7) for Greek
\r
40274 \begin_layout Description
\r
40276 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40280 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40283 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
\r
40286 \begin_layout Description
\r
40288 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40292 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40295 8859-8) for Hebrew
\r
40298 \begin_layout Description
\r
40300 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40304 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40307 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40312 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40316 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
40321 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40326 \begin_layout Description
\r
40328 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40332 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40335 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40339 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40342 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40348 \begin_layout Description
\r
40350 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40354 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40357 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40362 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40366 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
\r
40371 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40376 \begin_layout Description
\r
40378 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40382 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40385 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40389 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40394 \begin_layout Description
\r
40396 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40400 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40403 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40407 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40412 \begin_layout Description
\r
40414 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40417 (EUC-KR) for Korean
\r
40420 \begin_layout Description
\r
40422 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40426 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40430 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40433 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
\r
40436 \begin_layout Description
\r
40438 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40442 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40446 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40449 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
\r
40450 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
\r
40451 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
\r
40454 \begin_layout Description
\r
40456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40460 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40466 \begin_layout Description
\r
40468 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40472 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40475 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
\r
40476 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
\r
40479 \begin_layout Description
\r
40481 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40485 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40488 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
\r
40493 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40497 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
40502 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
\r
40505 \begin_layout Description
\r
40507 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40511 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40514 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
\r
40522 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
\r
40527 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
\r
40529 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
\r
40532 \begin_layout Description
\r
40534 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40538 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40541 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
\r
40546 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40550 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
\r
40555 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
\r
40558 \begin_layout Description
\r
40560 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40563 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
\r
40568 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40572 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
\r
40578 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
\r
40582 \begin_layout Description
\r
40584 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40588 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40592 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40595 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
\r
40596 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40602 \begin_layout Description
\r
40604 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40608 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40612 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40615 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
\r
40616 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
\r
40617 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
\r
40621 \begin_layout Description
\r
40623 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40627 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40631 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40634 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
\r
40635 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
\r
40638 \begin_layout Section
\r
40640 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40644 Color ! main text
\r
40650 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40654 Color ! background
\r
40660 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40664 Color ! Shaded boxes
\r
40670 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40674 Color ! Greyed-out notes
\r
40682 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40683 Here you can alter the font color for the
\r
40687 (default: black), for
\r
40690 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40695 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
\r
40699 (default: white) and for
\r
40702 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40712 sets the color back to the default.
\r
40715 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40716 Clicking any button showing
\r
40724 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
\r
40725 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
\r
40726 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
\r
40727 later more quickly.
\r
40730 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
40734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40735 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
\r
40737 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40740 out note appears blue in the output.)
\r
40748 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40749 Note, if you change the
\r
40752 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40757 font color and use the option
\r
40760 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40765 in the document settings under
\r
40768 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40773 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
\r
40774 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40780 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
\r
40787 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40788 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
40794 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40795 You can adapt the
\r
40798 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40803 font color and the
\r
40807 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
\r
40809 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40812 Code after a forced page break:
\r
40815 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40816 For the page color:
\r
40817 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40824 pagecolor{color name}
\r
40827 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40828 For the text color:
\r
40829 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40836 color{color name}
\r
40839 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40840 You are restricted to one of
\r
40876 unless you have defined your own color (see the
\r
40883 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40889 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40892 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
\r
40893 names to refer to them:
\r
40896 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40901 background color:
\r
40902 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40907 page_backgroundcolor
\r
40910 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40914 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40920 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40925 document_fontcolor
\r
40928 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40932 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40937 background color:
\r
40938 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40946 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40950 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40956 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40964 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40965 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
\r
40966 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40969 Cells of the Embedded
\r
40970 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40976 \begin_layout Section
\r
40980 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40981 Here you can adjust the
\r
40985 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
\r
40987 Table of Contents
\r
40989 as described in section
\r
40990 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40996 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
41003 \begin_layout Section
\r
41007 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41008 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
\r
41013 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41017 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
\r
41027 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41031 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
\r
41037 You can enable a
\r
41039 Sectioned bibliography
\r
41041 using the LaTeX package
\r
41046 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41050 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
\r
41055 and you can select a
\r
41059 for the generation of the bibliography.
\r
41060 For a further description see section
\r
41061 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41067 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
41074 \begin_layout Section
\r
41078 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41079 Here you can define the
\r
41083 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
\r
41085 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41091 reference "sec:Index"
\r
41098 \begin_layout Section
\r
41102 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41103 The PDF properties are explained in section
\r
41104 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41110 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
\r
41117 \begin_layout Section
\r
41121 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41122 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
\r
41127 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41131 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
\r
41141 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41145 LaTeX-packages ! esint
\r
41155 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41159 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
\r
41169 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41173 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
\r
41178 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
\r
41181 \begin_layout Description
\r
41182 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
\r
41183 ensure that you have enabled
\r
41186 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41194 \begin_layout Description
\r
41195 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
\r
41198 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41210 \begin_layout Description
\r
41211 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
\r
41222 \begin_layout Description
\r
41223 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
\r
41225 Chemical Symbols and Equations
\r
41234 \begin_layout Section
\r
41238 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41239 The float placement options are described in the section
\r
41242 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41250 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41258 \begin_layout Section
\r
41262 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41263 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
\r
41265 Program Code Listings
\r
41270 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41278 \begin_layout Section
\r
41282 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41283 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
\r
41291 set to be used and set the
\r
41296 The itemize environment is described in section
\r
41297 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41303 reference "sec:Itemize"
\r
41310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41311 You can furthermore specify a
\r
41314 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41319 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
\r
41320 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
\r
41327 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
\r
41329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41333 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
41337 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
\r
41340 you need to enter
\r
41344 circlearrowright$
\r
41347 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
\r
41348 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
\r
41351 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41352 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41360 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
\r
41363 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41364 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41366 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41372 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
\r
41376 usepackage{textcomp}
\r
41379 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
\r
41383 usepackage{amssymb}
\r
41393 \begin_layout Section
\r
41397 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41398 Branches are described in section
\r
41399 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41405 reference "sec:Branches"
\r
41412 \begin_layout Section
\r
41414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41415 LatexCommand label
\r
41416 name "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
41423 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41424 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
\r
41427 \begin_layout Description
\r
41429 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41433 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41436 Format: The format that is used when you enter
\r
41437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41456 View Master Document
\r
41457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41464 Update Master Document
\r
41465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41472 menu or the toolbar.
\r
41473 The default is set in
\r
41475 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41476 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41478 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41481 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41485 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41491 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
41498 \begin_layout Description
\r
41500 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41504 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41507 Output settings for the menu
\r
41509 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41511 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41517 For a detailed description see section
\r
41519 Reverse DVI/PDF search
\r
41524 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41532 \begin_layout Description
\r
41534 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41538 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41541 Options offers settings for the export format
\r
41547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41560 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41565 will assure that the output follows exactly version
\r
41566 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41569 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
\r
41573 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41578 settings are described in detail in section
\r
41580 Math Output in XHTML
\r
41585 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41594 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41598 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41603 is used for the size of equations in the output.
\r
41606 \begin_layout Section
\r
41611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41621 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41622 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
\r
41623 or to define LaTeX-commands.
\r
41624 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
\r
41625 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
\r
41629 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41630 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
\r
41631 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41637 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
41644 \begin_layout Section
\r
41649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41659 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41660 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
\r
41661 or to define LaTeX-commands.
\r
41662 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
\r
41663 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
\r
41667 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41668 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
\r
41669 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41675 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
41682 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
41688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41689 LatexCommand label
\r
41690 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
\r
41695 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41707 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41708 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
\r
41710 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41714 It has the following submenus.
\r
41717 \begin_layout Section
\r
41721 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41726 User Interface File
\r
41727 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41731 Customization ! of toolbars
\r
41737 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41741 Customization ! of menus
\r
41749 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41750 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
\r
41751 interface (ui) file.
\r
41752 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
\r
41757 loads three files:
\r
41760 \begin_layout Description
\r
41765 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
\r
41768 \begin_layout Description
\r
41775 the menu entries in popup context menus
\r
41778 \begin_layout Description
\r
41783 specifies the toolbar buttons
\r
41786 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41787 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
\r
41788 and edit the entries.
\r
41791 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41792 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
\r
41804 entries must be finished with an explicit
\r
41809 They may contain
\r
41829 and in the case of the
\r
41830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41842 The syntax for the entries is:
\r
41845 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41846 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41874 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41876 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41879 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
\r
41881 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41894 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41902 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41903 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
41909 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41910 For example, assuming you use the menu
\r
41912 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41915 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
\r
41919 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41920 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41944 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41946 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41953 navigate_bookmarks
\r
41954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41961 to have the sixth bookmark.
\r
41964 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41968 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41973 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
\r
41974 The currently available icon sets are compared in
\r
41975 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
41976 LatexCommand href
\r
41977 name "this image"
\r
41978 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
\r
41985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41989 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41992 Enable tool tips in main work area
\r
41994 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
\r
41998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42002 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42005 Restore window layouts and geometries
\r
42007 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
\r
42008 in the last LyX session.
\r
42011 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42014 Restore cursor positions
\r
42016 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
\r
42017 the last session.
\r
42020 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42023 Load opened files from last session
\r
42025 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
\r
42028 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42031 Clear all session information
\r
42033 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
\r
42034 of last opened documents, etc.).
\r
42037 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42040 LatexCommand label
\r
42041 name "sub:Backup documents"
\r
42046 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42050 Backup ! Documents
\r
42058 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42061 Backup original documents when saving
\r
42063 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
\r
42064 it was saved the last time.
\r
42065 It is stored in the
\r
42068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42074 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42080 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
42084 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
\r
42087 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42093 The backup file has the file extension
\r
42094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42108 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42111 Backup documents, every
\r
42113 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
\r
42116 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42119 Save documents compressed by default
\r
42121 always saves files in a compressed format.
\r
42124 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42127 Maximum last files
\r
42129 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
\r
42132 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
42134 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42142 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42145 Open documents in tabs
\r
42147 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
\r
42150 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42155 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
\r
42156 \begin_inset Foot
\r
42159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42167 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
42171 for information about LyXServer pipes.
\r
42177 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
\r
42179 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
\r
42182 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42185 Single close-tab button
\r
42187 is checked, there will only be one close button (
\r
42190 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
42191 filename ../images/closetab.png
\r
42198 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
\r
42199 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
\r
42202 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42203 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
42206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42211 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
\r
42219 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42221 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42232 LatexCommand label
\r
42233 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
42240 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42241 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
\r
42244 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42245 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
42248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42253 This section only deals with the fonts
\r
42258 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
\r
42261 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
42262 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
42273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42274 By default, LyX uses
\r
42275 \family typewriter
\r
42283 \family typewriter
\r
42287 \family typewriter
\r
42290 (depends on the system) as its
\r
42293 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42299 \family typewriter
\r
42303 \family typewriter
\r
42309 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42310 You can change the font size with the
\r
42317 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42322 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
\r
42324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42327 points have the size of 1
\r
42328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42331 inch, see Appendix
\r
42332 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42338 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
42343 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
\r
42344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42348 The sizes are explained in detail in section
\r
42349 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42355 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
42362 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42365 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
\r
42367 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
\r
42368 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
\r
42369 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
\r
42370 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
\r
42372 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
\r
42373 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42379 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42381 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42385 Color ! LyX screen
\r
42391 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42403 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42404 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
\r
42405 the list and selecting the
\r
42412 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42413 By checking the option
\r
42415 Use system colors
\r
42417 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
\r
42420 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
\r
42421 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42425 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42430 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
\r
42433 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42435 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42439 Settings ! Display
\r
42447 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42448 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
\r
42451 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42456 enables previewing snippets of your document.
\r
42457 This feature is described in section
\r
42458 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42464 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
42471 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42472 Checking the option
\r
42475 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42479 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42483 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42488 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
\r
42491 \begin_layout Section
\r
42493 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42497 Settings ! Editing
\r
42505 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42513 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42516 Cursor follows scrollbar
\r
42518 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
\r
42522 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42523 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
\r
42524 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
\r
42525 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
\r
42528 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42531 Scroll below end of document
\r
42533 is self-explanatory.
\r
42536 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42537 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
\r
42544 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
\r
42546 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
\r
42547 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
\r
42550 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42553 Sort environments alphabetically
\r
42555 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
\r
42558 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42561 Group environments by their category
\r
42563 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
\r
42566 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42571 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
\r
42582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42586 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42587 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
\r
42592 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
\r
42593 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
\r
42594 appears centered.
\r
42597 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42599 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42609 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42613 Settings ! Shortcuts
\r
42621 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42626 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
\r
42627 Several binding files are available, among them:
\r
42630 \begin_layout Description
\r
42631 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
\r
42634 \begin_layout Description
\r
42635 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
\r
42647 \begin_layout Description
\r
42648 mac.bind a set of bindings for
\r
42651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42659 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42660 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
\r
42665 , and binding files for special languages.
\r
42666 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
\r
42667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42671 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
42675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42683 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
\r
42687 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42688 Some binding files, like
\r
42692 , only have a limited scope.
\r
42693 When looking at the end of the file
\r
42697 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
\r
42700 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42704 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42708 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42713 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
\r
42714 in the selected key binding file.
\r
42717 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42718 Editing Shortcuts
\r
42719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42720 LatexCommand label
\r
42721 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
\r
42726 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42730 Key Bindings ! Editing
\r
42738 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42739 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
\r
42740 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
\r
42741 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
\r
42742 provides the field
\r
42744 Show key-bindings containing
\r
42747 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
\r
42748 Insert there for example as keyword
\r
42749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42756 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
\r
42757 functions that contain
\r
42758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42766 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
\r
42767 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
\r
42771 that you will find in the
\r
42778 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42779 For example, to add the shortcut
\r
42783 for the function
\r
42787 , select the function and press the
\r
42792 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
\r
42793 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
\r
42796 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42797 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
\r
42798 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
\r
42799 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
\r
42800 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
\r
42801 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
\r
42806 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42807 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
\r
42810 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42811 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
\r
42813 The syntax of the entries is:
\r
42816 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42840 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42843 LatexCommand label
\r
42844 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
\r
42849 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42859 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42863 Settings ! Keyboard Map
\r
42871 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42872 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
\r
42873 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
\r
42874 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
\r
42875 is a Romanian one, you can enable
\r
42878 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42882 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42887 and select the keyboard map file named
\r
42894 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42895 You can specify a
\r
42903 keyboard map and, if you use the
\r
42907 bindings, you can select the first and second with
\r
42908 \begin_inset Info
\r
42910 arg "keymap-primary"
\r
42914 \begin_inset Info
\r
42916 arg "keymap-secondary"
\r
42919 respectively or toggle between them with
\r
42920 \begin_inset Info
\r
42922 arg "keymap-toggle"
\r
42928 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
42932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42937 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
\r
42946 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42947 You can also specify the mouse
\r
42949 Wheel scrolling speed
\r
42952 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
\r
42956 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42964 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42968 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42973 you can select a key for zooming.
\r
42974 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
\r
42977 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42981 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42982 Input completion is described in section
\r
42983 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42989 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
\r
42996 \begin_layout Section
\r
42998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42999 LatexCommand label
\r
43005 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43015 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43027 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43028 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
\r
43029 the installation.
\r
43030 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
\r
43033 \begin_layout Description
\r
43035 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43038 directory This is LyX's working directory.
\r
43039 It is the default when you
\r
43050 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43058 \begin_layout Description
\r
43060 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43063 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
\r
43065 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43067 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43071 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43079 \begin_layout Description
\r
43081 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43084 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
\r
43090 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43094 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43098 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
43101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43110 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
\r
43118 \begin_layout Description
\r
43120 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43124 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43128 Backup ! Directory
\r
43133 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
\r
43134 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
\r
43135 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43141 reference "sub:Backup documents"
\r
43147 Working directory
\r
43149 will be used to save the backups.
\r
43150 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43153 Backup files have the ending
\r
43154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43164 \begin_layout Description
\r
43169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43177 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43180 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
\r
43181 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
\r
43182 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43189 You add a BibTeX-database
\r
43193 to your document.
\r
43194 You can edit this file with the program
\r
43195 \family typewriter
\r
43200 \family typewriter
\r
43203 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
\r
43206 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43212 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
\r
43214 \family typewriter
\r
43217 and click on the LyX-symbol.
\r
43218 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
\r
43219 in your LyX file.
\r
43221 \family typewriter
\r
43224 and LyX need to be running the same time.
\r
43225 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43228 The pipe is also used for the
\r
43232 feature, see sec.
\r
43233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43239 reference "sub:Backup documents"
\r
43244 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43247 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
\r
43248 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43264 \begin_layout Description
\r
43266 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43269 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
\r
43272 \begin_layout Description
\r
43274 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43277 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
\r
43278 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
\r
43279 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
\r
43282 \begin_layout Description
\r
43284 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43287 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
\r
43289 \family typewriter
\r
43293 You only need to specify it if you are using
\r
43294 \family typewriter
\r
43297 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
\r
43299 For LyX on Windows
\r
43300 \family typewriter
\r
43303 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
\r
43307 \begin_layout Description
\r
43309 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43312 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
\r
43313 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
\r
43314 where to find it on the system.
\r
43315 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
\r
43316 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
\r
43318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43325 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
\r
43326 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
\r
43329 \begin_layout Description
\r
43331 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43334 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
\r
43335 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
\r
43336 document preamble.
\r
43337 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
\r
43338 a single dot '.').
\r
43339 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
\r
43340 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
\r
43341 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
\r
43342 scanned for the input files.
\r
43343 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
\r
43344 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
\r
43345 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
\r
43346 compilation may fail for some documents.
\r
43349 \begin_layout Section
\r
43353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43354 Here you can insert your
\r
43363 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
\r
43365 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43371 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
43375 , to mark changes you make as yours.
\r
43378 \begin_layout Section
\r
43379 Language Settings
\r
43380 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43384 Language ! Settings
\r
43390 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43394 Settings ! Language
\r
43402 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43405 LatexCommand label
\r
43406 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
43413 \begin_layout Description
\r
43415 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43419 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43422 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
\r
43423 You can find its actual translation status here:
\r
43424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
43425 LatexCommand href
\r
43426 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
\r
43433 \begin_layout Description
\r
43435 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43438 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
\r
43440 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
\r
43441 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
\r
43442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43458 The most widespread language package is
\r
43463 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43467 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
43472 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
\r
43473 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
\r
43474 alternative language package
\r
43479 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43483 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
\r
43488 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
\r
43489 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
\r
43495 The available selections are described in section
\r
43496 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43502 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
43509 \begin_layout Description
\r
43511 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43514 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
\r
43515 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
\r
43516 An example is the start command
\r
43522 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
\r
43527 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
43528 LatexCommand cite
\r
43534 The default is the
\r
43542 selectlanguage{$$lang}
\r
43547 \begin_layout Description
\r
43549 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43552 end Counterpart to
\r
43557 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
\r
43558 command toggles the package on and off.
\r
43561 \begin_layout Description
\r
43563 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43567 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43570 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
\r
43574 \begin_layout Description
\r
43576 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43580 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43583 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
\r
43584 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
\r
43585 used by all LaTeX-packages.
\r
43586 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
\r
43593 \begin_layout Description
\r
43595 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43598 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
\r
43600 When this option is not set, the
\r
43603 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43608 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
\r
43609 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
\r
43612 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43617 than the default.
\r
43620 \begin_layout Description
\r
43622 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43625 end Counterpart to
\r
43628 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43634 When it is not set, the
\r
43637 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43642 is set to the end of the document.
\r
43645 \begin_layout Description
\r
43647 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43654 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
\r
43655 language will be underlined in blue.
\r
43658 \begin_layout Description
\r
43660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43664 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43667 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
\r
43668 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
\r
43671 \begin_layout Description
\r
43673 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43676 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
\r
43677 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
\r
43678 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
\r
43679 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
\r
43682 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43686 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43687 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
\r
43688 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43694 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
43701 \begin_layout Section
\r
43705 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43709 \begin_layout Description
\r
43711 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43715 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43718 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
\r
43721 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43722 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43724 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43730 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
\r
43733 \begin_layout Description
\r
43735 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43739 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43749 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43753 Settings ! Date format
\r
43758 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
\r
43759 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43763 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
43766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43768 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
\r
43774 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43777 For example the format
\r
43778 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43782 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43785 prints the date as day/month/year.
\r
43788 \begin_layout Description
\r
43790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43794 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43797 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
\r
43800 \begin_layout Description
\r
43802 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43805 search Commands that will be used for the menu
\r
43807 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43809 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43815 For a detailed description see section
\r
43817 Reverse DVI/PDF search
\r
43822 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43830 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43833 LatexCommand label
\r
43834 name "sub:Printer"
\r
43839 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43849 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43853 Settings ! Printer
\r
43861 \begin_layout Description
\r
43863 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43866 printer Here you can specify the name of your
\r
43871 The name will be used when the
\r
43876 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43880 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
43883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43888 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
\r
43896 \begin_layout Description
\r
43898 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43901 command is the command LyX
\r
43902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43909 LaTeX uses for printing.
\r
43917 \begin_layout Description
\r
43919 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43923 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43926 Options Here you can specify printer options.
\r
43927 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
\r
43928 of the program that provides the
\r
43935 \begin_layout Description
\r
43937 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43941 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43945 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43948 printer This option works only for the
\r
43953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43965 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
\r
43966 This is an option only for dvips experts.
\r
43969 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43983 LatexCommand label
\r
43984 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
43989 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44001 \begin_layout Description
\r
44003 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44018 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44022 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44025 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
\r
44030 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
\r
44051 are used for Cyrillic.
\r
44052 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
\r
44053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
44061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
44065 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
\r
44066 LyX sets up in the background.
\r
44067 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
\r
44070 \begin_layout Description
\r
44072 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44076 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44079 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
\r
44084 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
\r
44087 \begin_layout Description
\r
44089 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44093 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44097 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44101 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44104 options They only have an effect when the program
\r
44108 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
\r
44111 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44112 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
\r
44113 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
\r
44114 manuals of the applications.
\r
44117 \begin_layout Description
\r
44119 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44122 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
\r
44123 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
44129 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
44136 \begin_layout Description
\r
44138 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44141 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
\r
44142 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
44148 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
44155 \begin_layout Description
\r
44157 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44160 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
\r
44161 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
44167 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
\r
44174 \begin_layout Description
\r
44179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44187 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44190 command Command for the program
\r
44194 that is described in the section
\r
44200 Additional Features
\r
44205 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44206 There are additionally the following options:
\r
44209 \begin_layout Description
\r
44211 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44215 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44219 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44223 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44227 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44230 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
\r
44231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
44237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
44240 is used instead of
\r
44241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
44245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
44248 to separate folders.
\r
44249 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
\r
44250 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44260 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44272 \begin_layout Description
\r
44274 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44278 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44282 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44286 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44290 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44294 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44297 changes Removes all manually set
\r
44303 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
44304 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
44306 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44311 dialog when changing the document class.
\r
44314 \begin_layout Section
\r
44316 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44320 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44332 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
44334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
44335 LatexCommand label
\r
44336 name "sub:Converters"
\r
44341 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44354 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
\r
44355 from one format to another.
\r
44356 You can modify converters or create new ones.
\r
44357 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
\r
44364 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44369 field and press the
\r
44374 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
\r
44378 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44383 drop-down list, modify the
\r
44387 field and press the
\r
44394 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44397 Converter File Cache
\r
44403 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
\r
44405 Maximum Age (in days
\r
44408 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
\r
44409 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
\r
44412 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44413 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
\r
44414 definition, is described in the section
\r
44425 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
44427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
44428 LatexCommand label
\r
44429 name "sec:File-Formats"
\r
44434 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44444 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44456 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44457 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
\r
44458 You can modify the
\r
44466 programs that should be used for certain formats.
\r
44469 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44470 You can also define the
\r
44472 Default output format
\r
44474 that is used when you use
\r
44476 View, Update, View Master Document
\r
44480 Update Master Document
\r
44486 menu or the toolbar.
\r
44489 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44490 More about formats and their options is described in the section
\r
44501 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44502 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
\r
44503 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
\r
44504 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
\r
44505 This is done by specifying a
\r
44510 More about this is described in the section
\r
44521 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
44522 Units available in LyX
\r
44523 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
44534 LatexCommand label
\r
44535 name "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
44542 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44544 \begin_inset space ~
\r
44548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
44550 reference "tab:Units"
\r
44554 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
\r
44557 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44558 \begin_inset Float table
\r
44564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44565 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
44569 LatexCommand label
\r
44582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44583 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
44589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44591 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
44592 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
\r
44593 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
44594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
\r
44595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
\r
44597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44598 \begin_inset Text
\r
44600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44607 \begin_inset Text
\r
44609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44618 \begin_inset Text
\r
44620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44627 \begin_inset Text
\r
44629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44638 \begin_inset Text
\r
44640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44647 \begin_inset Text
\r
44649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44658 \begin_inset Text
\r
44660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44667 \begin_inset Text
\r
44669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44678 \begin_inset Text
\r
44680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44687 \begin_inset Text
\r
44689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44706 \begin_inset Text
\r
44708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44715 \begin_inset Text
\r
44717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44734 \begin_inset Text
\r
44736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44743 \begin_inset Text
\r
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44746 scaled point (65536
\r
44747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44762 \begin_inset Text
\r
44764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44771 \begin_inset Text
\r
44773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44790 \begin_inset Text
\r
44792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44799 \begin_inset Text
\r
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44807 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
\r
44811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44822 \begin_inset Text
\r
44824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44831 \begin_inset Text
\r
44833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44850 \begin_inset Text
\r
44852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44859 \begin_inset Text
\r
44861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44862 % of original image width
\r
44869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44870 \begin_inset Text
\r
44872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44879 \begin_inset Text
\r
44881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44890 \begin_inset Text
\r
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44899 \begin_inset Text
\r
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44902 % of column width
\r
44909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44910 \begin_inset Text
\r
44912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44919 \begin_inset Text
\r
44921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44930 \begin_inset Text
\r
44932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44939 \begin_inset Text
\r
44941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44950 \begin_inset Text
\r
44952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44959 \begin_inset Text
\r
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44970 \begin_inset Text
\r
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44979 \begin_inset Text
\r
44981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44982 % of paper height
\r
44989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44990 \begin_inset Text
\r
44992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44999 \begin_inset Text
\r
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45002 height of letter
\r
45013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
45014 \begin_inset Text
\r
45016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
45023 \begin_inset Text
\r
45025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
45038 \begin_inset Text
\r
45040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
45047 \begin_inset Text
\r
45049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
45055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
45076 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
45078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
45079 LatexCommand label
\r
45080 name "chap:Credits"
\r
45087 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45088 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
\r
45089 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
\r
45092 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45095 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
\r
45098 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45104 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45110 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45116 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45122 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45128 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45134 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45140 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45143 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
\r
45146 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45152 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45158 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45164 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45170 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45176 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45182 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45188 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45194 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
45196 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
45197 LatexCommand cite
\r
45205 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45206 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
\r
45209 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
\r
45216 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45217 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45218 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45226 LatexCommand href
\r
45228 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
\r
45233 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45237 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45242 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
\r
45250 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45251 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45252 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45253 key "latexcompanion"
\r
45257 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
\r
45259 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
\r
45262 Addison-Wesley, 2004
\r
45265 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45266 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45267 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45272 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
\r
45275 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
\r
45278 Addison-Wesley, 2003
\r
45281 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45283 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45290 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
\r
45293 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
\r
45296 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45298 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45310 Addison-Wesley, 1984
\r
45313 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45315 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45316 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
45320 The TeX Catalogue:
\r
45321 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45325 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45330 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
\r
45338 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45339 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45340 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45346 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45350 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45355 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
\r
45363 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45364 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45365 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45372 LatexCommand href
\r
45373 name "Documentation"
\r
45374 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
\r
45383 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45387 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45392 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
\r
45400 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45401 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45402 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45408 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45409 LatexCommand href
\r
45410 name "Documentation"
\r
45411 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
\r
45415 how to use the program
\r
45420 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45424 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45429 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
\r
45437 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45438 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45439 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45445 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45446 LatexCommand href
\r
45447 name "Documentation"
\r
45448 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
\r
45457 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45461 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45466 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
\r
45474 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45475 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45476 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45483 LatexCommand href
\r
45484 name "Documentation"
\r
45485 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
\r
45494 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45498 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45503 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
\r
45511 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45513 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45520 LatexCommand href
\r
45521 name "Documentation"
\r
45522 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
\r
45526 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
\r
45527 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45531 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45536 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
\r
45544 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45546 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45553 LatexCommand href
\r
45554 name "Documentation"
\r
45555 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
\r
45559 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45564 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45568 LaTeX-packages ! caption
\r
45574 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45578 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45583 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
\r
45591 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45593 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45600 LatexCommand href
\r
45601 name "Documentation"
\r
45602 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
\r
45606 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45611 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45615 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
45621 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45625 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45630 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
\r
45638 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45639 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45640 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45646 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45647 LatexCommand href
\r
45648 name "Documentation"
\r
45649 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
\r
45653 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45658 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45662 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
45668 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45672 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45677 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
\r
45685 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45686 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45687 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45693 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45694 LatexCommand href
\r
45695 name "Documentation"
\r
45696 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
\r
45700 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45705 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45709 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
45715 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45719 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45724 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
\r
45732 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45734 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45741 LatexCommand href
\r
45742 name "Documentation"
\r
45743 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
\r
45747 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45752 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45756 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
\r
45762 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45766 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45771 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
\r
45779 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45780 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45781 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45788 LatexCommand href
\r
45789 name "Documentation"
\r
45790 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
\r
45794 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45799 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45803 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
45809 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45813 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45818 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
\r
45826 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45828 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45835 LatexCommand href
\r
45836 name "Documentation"
\r
45837 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
\r
45841 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45846 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45850 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
45856 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45860 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45865 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
\r
45873 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45874 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45875 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45881 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45882 LatexCommand href
\r
45884 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
\r
45888 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
\r
45889 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45893 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45898 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
\r
45906 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45907 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45908 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45914 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45915 LatexCommand href
\r
45917 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
\r
45921 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
\r
45922 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45926 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45931 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
\r
45939 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45941 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45948 LatexCommand href
\r
45950 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
\r
45954 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
\r
45955 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45959 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45964 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
\r
45972 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45974 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45981 LatexCommand href
\r
45983 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
\r
45987 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
\r
45988 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45992 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45997 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
\r
46005 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
46006 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
46007 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
46013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
46014 LatexCommand href
\r
46016 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
\r
46020 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
\r
46021 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
46025 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
46028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46030 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
\r
46038 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
46039 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
46040 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
46046 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
46047 LatexCommand href
\r
46049 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
\r
46053 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
\r
46054 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
46058 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
46061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46063 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
\r
46071 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
46072 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
46073 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
46079 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
46080 LatexCommand href
\r
46082 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
\r
46086 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
\r
46087 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
46091 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
46094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46096 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
\r
46104 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
46105 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
46106 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
46112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
46113 LatexCommand href
\r
46115 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
\r
46119 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
\r
46120 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
46124 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
46127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46129 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
\r
46137 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
46138 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
46139 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
46145 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
46146 LatexCommand href
\r
46148 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
\r
46152 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
\r
46153 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
46157 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46162 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
\r
46170 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
46171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
46172 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
46178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
46179 LatexCommand href
\r
46181 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
\r
46185 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
\r
46186 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
46190 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
46193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46195 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
\r
46203 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
46204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
46205 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
46211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
46212 LatexCommand href
\r
46214 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
\r
46218 about new features in
\r
46223 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
46227 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
46230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46232 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
\r
46240 \begin_layout Standard
\r
46241 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
\r
46248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46275 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
46285 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
\r
46286 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
\r
46287 bibliography is the second one:
\r
46295 \begin_layout Standard
\r
46296 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
\r
46297 LatexCommand bibtex
\r
46298 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
\r
46299 options "biblio/alphadin"
\r
46306 \begin_layout Standard
\r
46307 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
\r
46310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
46311 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
\r
46312 LatexCommand printnomenclature
\r
46318 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
\r
46319 LatexCommand printindex
\r